JP2020018931A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine in which control load accompanying output of a state generation signal to an external device such as a hall computer can be reduced effectively.SOLUTION: According to a game machine of the present invention, whenever output of a state generation signal is started, output of the state generation signal is started and then a first period being an output period of the signal is measured. After that, a second period set in advance as an OFF period after the output of the signal is terminated is measured. Therefore, both of the management of the output period (that is, the first period) of the state generation signal and the management of a predetermined period (that is, the second period) after the output of the state generation signal is terminated can be achieved without performing the process of setting in period measurement means according to the measurement start timing of each period. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load accompanying output of a state generation signal to a calculation device for each generation of the state.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 13

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine and the like.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, centralized management by a hall computer has been implemented for gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slots installed in a game arcade (for example, Patent Documents 1 and 2). As such a form of centralized management, for example, a starting port winning signal indicating that a game ball has won a predetermined winning port (for example, a starting port where a jackpot lottery is triggered by the winning of a game ball), Signals corresponding to various states generated during the game, such as a prize ball signal indicating that a ball has been paid out by winning a prize hole, a jackpot signal indicating a jackpot state (hereinafter, this signal is referred to as a "state generation signal ) May be output from each of the gaming machines to the hall computer, and on the side of the hall computer receiving these signals, the number of pitches per jackpot and the number of balls other than during the jackpot are determined based on the received signals. The number of pitches (base) is calculated, and the result is output to a monitor or paper.

  In this manner, data output from the hall computer, for example, data such as the number of pitches per jackpot, the number of pitches other than during the jackpot, and the number of game balls passing through the starting port, obtain appropriate profits. For the purpose, it is used by hall managers for pachinko machine nail adjustment and fraud monitoring.

  Here, the output of the state generation signal from each gaming machine to the hall computer is started by generating an ON signal whose output state is inverted when a predetermined state occurs, and thereafter, the hall computer outputs the ON signal. Is continued for the first period (for example, 0.5 s) in which the ON state can be detected, and then the output state is inverted again to end.

  On the other hand, in order for the hall computer to distinguish the state generation signals adjacent in time series, after the output of the state generation signal is completed by inverting the output state again, the output state is changed to the second period (for example, 0). .5s). Therefore, when the gaming machine outputs the state generation signal to the hall computer, the hall computer can distinguish between the first period which is the output period of the ON signal serving as the state generation signal and the state generation signal which is adjacent in time series to the hall computer. It is required for the gaming machine to manage the second period which is the period.

  One of the general methods by which the gaming machine manages the first period and the second period described above includes a first counter that measures a first period (ie, an output period of a state generation signal), And a second counter for measuring a period of 2 (that is, a period necessary for the hall computer to distinguish the next state generation signal after the output of the state generation signal is completed), and each of these periods is measured. Is the way.

In such a method, for example, when the occurrence of a predetermined state is detected and the output of the state generation signal is started after the output of the state generation signal is started by the generation of the ON signal whose output state is inverted, An initial value corresponding to one period is set in the first counter, and the first period is measured by sequentially subtracting the value of the first counter. Then, when the value of the first counter indicates zero, that is, when the output of the state generation signal ends, a second period is subsequently set in the second counter, and the second counter is set. The second period is measured by sequentially subtracting the values of.
Alternatively, as another method for the gaming machine to manage the first period and the second period, there is a method in which one counter manages both the first period and the second period. In such a method, for example, when the occurrence of a predetermined state is detected and the output of the state generation signal is started by generation of an ON signal whose output state is inverted, the first period is set in the counter, The first period is measured by sequentially subtracting the value of the counter. Then, when the value of the counter indicates zero, that is, when the output of the state generation signal ends, the second period is set in the counter, and the value of the counter is sequentially reduced by sequentially setting the second period. The period of 2 is measured.

JP-A-7-59935 JP 2005-334218 A

  However, all of the above-described methods require the processing of setting the first period and the second period in the counter and the timer according to the timing of measurement start in each period, and the control by the control device is complicated. There was a problem of becoming. In particular, in the former method, it is necessary to provide a plurality of counters and timers according to the number of periods to be managed, and the storage capacity of the storage device increases.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which a control load associated with outputting a state generation signal to an external device such as a hall computer is effectively reduced. It is an object.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 generates a predetermined state during a game in which a game medium is passed through a game area and a game value is given to a player according to satisfaction of a predetermined condition. State detection means for detecting a state, and for a single occurrence of the state detected by the state detection means, after inverting the output state of the signal from the first state and maintaining it for a first period set in advance Signal output means for outputting a state generation signal of 1 by inverting again and returning to the first state, wherein when the output of the state generation signal is started by the signal output means, A period measuring unit that measures an elapsed period after the output of the state generation signal is started, and a first period that can determine whether the elapsed period measured by the period measuring unit has reached the first period. Arrival judgment And after the elapsed time period is determined by the first arrival determination means to have reached the first time period, the elapsed time period measured by the time period measurement means is the first time period. There is provided a second arrival determination means capable of determining whether or not the total period with the second period set in advance has been reached.

  A game machine according to claim 2 is the game machine according to claim 1, wherein when the output of the state generation signal is started by the signal output unit, the first period and the second period are added. A period setting unit that sets a value corresponding to a period as an initial value in the period measuring unit, wherein the period measuring unit starts outputting the state generation signal by the signal output unit, The elapsed period is measured by a method of subtracting a set value.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein in the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, the processing device to which the state generation signal is output is adjacent to the state generation signal in a time series during the second period. Is a period that can be distinguished.

  A gaming machine according to a fourth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects, wherein the first period and the second period are substantially the same.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the occurrence of the predetermined state during the game in which the game medium is passed through the game area and the game value is given to the player according to the establishment of the predetermined condition is determined by the state detection means. If detected, one state occurrence signal is output by the signal output means for one detected state occurrence. Here, the 1 state generation signal is generated by inverting the output state of the signal from the first state, maintaining the output state for the first period set in advance, and then inverting again to return to the first state. .

  When the output of the state generation signal by the signal output means is started in such a manner (that is, the output state of the signal is inverted from the first state), the elapsed time from the start of the output of the state generation signal is The measurement is started by the period measuring means. When the measurement of the elapsed period by the period measurement unit is started, first, the first arrival determination unit determines whether the elapsed period has reached the first period, that is, the output state of the signal is inverted again and the first arrival determination unit determines the first period. It is determined whether it is time to return to the state.

  When the first arrival determination unit determines that the elapsed period measured by the period measurement unit has reached the first period, the elapsed period subsequently reaches the second period set in advance. Is determined. Here, the second period is a period in which the operation device (for example, a management device installed outside the gaming machine) to which the state generation signal is output can distinguish the state generation signals adjacent in time series. In this case, the state generation signals adjacent in time series can be surely distinguished by the output destination arithmetic device. As a result, the occurrence of the state detected momentarily by the state detecting means can be reliably detected by the output destination arithmetic device.

  Therefore, both the management of the output period of the state generation signal (that is, the first period) and the management of the predetermined period after the output of the state generation signal (that is, the second period) are measured in each period. This can be realized without performing the process of setting the period measuring means according to the start timing. Therefore, there is an effect that the control load associated with outputting the state generation signal to the arithmetic unit every time a state is generated can be reduced.

  The lapse from the start of the output of the state generation signal by the signal output unit to the first period extends from the start of the output of the state generation signal by the signal output unit to the total period of the first period and the second period. Since it is measured as a passing point between the two, there is no need to provide a plurality of time-measurable components such as a counter and a timer as a period measuring means, and it is possible to suppress the consumption of storage capacity in the storage device.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the following effects are exhibited. When the output of the state generation signal is started by the signal output means (that is, the output state of the signal is inverted from the first state), the value corresponding to the sum period of the first period and the second period is It is set in the period setting means as an initial value. Thereafter, after the output of the state generation signal by the signal output unit is started, the period elapsed from the start of the output of the state generation signal by a method of subtracting the value set by the period setting unit is measured by the period measurement unit. You.

  Therefore, since the value set as the initial value in the period measuring unit is a value corresponding to the total period of the first period and the second period, once the initial value is set in the period measuring unit, It is possible to measure both the progress up to the first period and the total period of the first period and the second period, and to control the output of the state generation signal to the arithmetic unit every time a state is generated. There is an effect that the load can be reduced.

  Further, the period measuring unit in which a value corresponding to the sum period of the first period and the second period is set as an initial value is used for a period from the start of output of the state generation signal by the signal output unit to the first period. Since both the progress and the progress up to the sum of the first period and the second period can be measured, there is no need to provide a plurality of time-measurable components such as counters and timers as the period measuring means, and the storage device There is an effect that the consumption of storage capacity can be suppressed.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of the first or second aspect, the following effect is achieved. In the second period after the end of the output of the state generation signal, the arithmetic device (for example, a management device installed outside the game machine), which is the output destination of the state generation signal, distinguishes the state generation signals adjacent in time series. Since the period is set as possible, the state generation signals adjacent in time series can be surely distinguished by the output destination arithmetic device. As a result, there is an effect that the occurrence of a state detected momentarily by the state detection means can be reliably detected by the output destination arithmetic device.

According to the gaming machine of the fourth aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects, the following effects are exhibited. The first period and the second period are substantially the same, that is, the output period of the state generation signal is required to be able to distinguish the next state generation signal after the output of the state generation signal from the output destination arithmetic device. Since the same period is substantially the same, there is an effect that management of each period can be facilitated. In addition, the difference between the generation timing of each state and the output timing of the state generation signal can be reduced, and there is an effect that the data acquisition efficiency can be improved.
Here, by making the second period a period in which the arithmetic device which is the output destination of the state generation signal can distinguish the state generation signals adjacent in time series, the management of each period is easy and The state generation signals that are adjacent in series can be surely distinguished by the output destination arithmetic device. In particular, the difference between the occurrence timing of each state and the output timing of the state generation signal is reduced by setting the second period to be the shortest period in which a signal can be detected by the arithmetic device of the output destination or a period near the shortest period. Data acquisition efficiency can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in one embodiment. It is a front view of a game board. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. (A) is a figure which shows typically the area division setting of a display screen, and an effective line setting, and (b) is a figure which illustrates an actual display screen. It is a figure showing the outline of various counters. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a fluctuation process executed in the main process of FIG. 10 is a flowchart illustrating a change start process executed in the symbol change process of FIG. 9. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed in the timer interrupt process of FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing external information processing executed in the timer interrupt processing of FIG. It is a timing chart which shows the output timing of the 1st entrance passage signal. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process of 2nd Embodiment. 19 is a flowchart showing a switch monitoring process executed in the timer interrupt process of FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a switch monitoring process executed in the timer interrupt process of FIG. (A) is a flowchart showing an upper-stage operation port switch process, and (b) is a flowchart showing a lower-stage operation port switch process. (A) is a flowchart showing an upper first operating port switch process, and (b) is a flowchart showing a lower first operating port switch process. (A) is a flowchart showing an upper first winning opening switch process, and (b) is a flowchart showing a lower first winning opening switch process. 19 is a flowchart showing external information processing executed in the timer interrupt processing of FIG. It is a timing chart which shows the output timing of a specific operation port passage signal.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) for firing a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch for guiding a ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and is provided with a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16. On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape that projects forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the effect pattern of the variable display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or changing the effect content at the time of the reach effect.

  In addition, light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot.

  In addition, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and which can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs. Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right side illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing spheres that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface at the center thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. (Not shown) and a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by a change in electric resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount. A ball is fired at a strength corresponding to the changing resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and a number of nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62 for ball guidance, a general winning opening 63, The entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the periphery thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are provided with wood screws from the front side of the game board 13. And so on. In addition, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window 14 c of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear of the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 surround the front and rear of the game board 13. A game area to be played is formed. The game area is a substantially circular area formed on the front surface of the game board 13 and divided by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70.

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is provided between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

  A first symbol display device 37 provided with a plurality of LEDs 37a, which are light emitting means, and a seven-segment display 37b, is provided in the upper right portion of the game area as viewed from the front (the upper right portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display device 37 performs a display according to each control performed by the main control device 110, and mainly displays a game state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing probability, reducing the time, or in the normal state by a lighting state, indicating whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not, by the lighting state, and a symbol corresponding to a probability change in a stop symbol. The lighting state indicates whether the symbol is a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot or an off-design, or the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state. The seven-segment display device 37b displays the number of rounds during a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37a are configured to emit different colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs, and various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 can be indicated with a small number of LEDs by a combination of the emitted colors. .

  In addition, the above-mentioned pachinko machine 10 being in a probable change state is a game state in which the jackpot probability increases and the game easily shifts to the special game state. Further, during the probable change in the present embodiment, the hit state of the second symbol is increased, and the ball is likely to enter the first entrance 64 (see FIG. 3). In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a reduced working hours, it is a game state in which it is easy for the ball to enter the first entrance 64 (see FIG. 3), with only the winning probability of the second symbol being increased while the jackpot probability remains unchanged. . Also, the pachinko machine 10 being in the normal state is a game state in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is in progress (the state in which neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased). In addition, according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10, the opening time of the electrically-powered accessory (not shown) attached to the first entrance 64 and the number of times the electrically-driven accessory is opened per one time are changed. It is good.

  In the game area, a plurality of general prize holes 63 are provided in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 includes a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “LCD”) that displays the third symbol in a variable manner when a winning in the first entrance 64 is triggered. A second symbol display device 82 including a light-emitting diode (hereinafter abbreviated as “LED”) that variably displays the second symbol when the ball passes through the second entrance 67 is used as a trigger.

  The display contents of the third symbol display device 81 are controlled by a display control device 114 described later, and, for example, three symbol columns of left, middle, and right are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Further, in the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display having an 8-inch size, and the variable display device unit 80 includes a center frame 86 surrounding the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. Are arranged. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, while the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. Decorative display is performed according to the display. Note that, instead of the LCD, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Also, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 until the stop symbol (any one of the probable jackpot symbol, the ordinary jackpot symbol, and the off symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The number of times the ball is held is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of times the ball is held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the number of lighting of the holding lamp 85. The four holding lamps 85 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically above the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the winning in the first entrance 64 is configured to be held up to four times. However, the maximum number of holdings is not limited to four, and three or less, Alternatively, it may be set to five or more times (for example, eight times). In addition, the holding lamp 85 is deleted, and the number of times the variable display is held based on the winning in the first entrance 64 is held numerically in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is held. The display may be performed in a different mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern) by the number of times. Further, since the number of times of holding is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the holding lamp 85.

  The second symbol display device 82 has a display portion 83 of a second symbol and a holding lamp 84, and each time a ball passes through the second entrance 67, a display symbol (second symbol) is displayed on the display portion 83. The symbol “O” and the symbol “X” are alternately lit to perform a variable display, and when the variable display stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, the symbol “O”), the first symbol is displayed. The entrance 64 is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time. The number of times the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of times held is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37 and is also lit by the holding lamp 84. In addition, the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps on the display unit 83 as in the present embodiment, and also the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. May be performed using a part of. Similarly, the holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Also, as with the first entrance 64, the maximum number of times of passage through the second entrance 67 is not limited to four, but is three or less, or five or more (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of times of suspension is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the suspension lamp 84.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter is provided. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (a part of various switches 208) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. Due to this, a jackpot lottery is performed by the main controller 110, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. Further, the first entrance 64 is also one of the winning openings from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball enters.

  A variable winning device 65 is provided below the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery in the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so that the big hit is stopped and the LED 37a is turned on. The stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is performed.

  The variable prize winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening opening solenoid (solenoid 209 (see FIG. 4)). The specific winning port 65a is normally in a closed state where a ball cannot be won or hard to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening mouth solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are provided. It operates so that the state and the state are alternately repeated.

  Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-described embodiment. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the jackpot on the first symbol display device 37 is turned on, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening is provided. During the opening of the mouth 65a, a gaming state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins in the specific winning opening 65a is defined as a special gaming state. It may be formed.

  At the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, sticking spaces K1 and K2 for sticking stamps, identification labels and the like are provided. Through the small window 35.

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66 and a second ball entry port (through gate) 67. A ball that has not entered any of the winning ports 63, 64, and 65a is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out port 66. In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is peeled to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102 or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electric configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 has an external output buffer 203a, a first entrance passage counter 203b, and a signal output management counter 203c. Here, the external output buffer 203a is a buffer for storing setting data of a predetermined size (for example, 1 byte) to be output to the hall computer 262 via the external output terminal board 261.

  The external output buffer 203a is composed of a plurality of setting data bits, and each setting data bit is added to a state to be managed during the game (for example, to the first entrance 64 which is a winning opening which triggers a jackpot lottery). A value of 0 (off) or 1 (on) is set according to whether the ball has entered (passed), whether the game is a big hit, or the like.

  The setting of the value in the external output buffer 203a (that is, the setting of the value in each setting data bit) is updated at an interval of 2 ms, which is the execution interval of the external information processing (see FIG. 13). As described above, the setting data updated every 2 ms is output every time the external output processing is performed in the main processing (see FIG. 8) with 4 ms as one cycle (that is, at an interval of 4 ms). And transmitted to the hall computer 262.

  The first entrance passage counter 203b is a counter that counts a state in which a ball has passed through the first entrance opening 64 but the first entrance passage signal corresponding to the passage has not been output. Note that the “first entrance port passing signal” is an ON signal (see FIG. 14) output for a predetermined period (in the present embodiment, for 52 ms) for one pass to the first entrance port 64. ).

  After the first entrance opening counter 203b is cleared to 0 when the power is turned on, every time a ball enters the first entrance 64 (that is, the first entrance switch (a part of the various switches 208) 1) is added each time ()) is detected, and is subtracted by 1 in external information processing (see FIG. 13) described later each time one first entrance passage signal is output.

  Therefore, when the value of the first entrance passage counter 203b is 0, the number of first entrance passage signals corresponding to the number of times the ball has passed through the first entrance 64 is transmitted via the external output terminal plate 261. Is transmitted to the hall computer 262. On the other hand, when the first entrance passage counter 203b indicates a value of 1 or more, the passage of the ball to the first entrance 64 by the number indicated by the first entrance passage counter 203b is detected. Nevertheless, it indicates that there is a first entrance passage signal that has not been output (not transmitted, waiting) to the hall computer 262.

  The signal output management counter 203c includes an output period (first period) of the first entrance passage signal and a period after the end of the first entrance passage signal, and the hall computer 262 arrives next. This is a counter for measuring (measuring) both the off period (second period) in which the first entrance passage signal can be distinguished.

  Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in managing the output period of the first entrance passage signal to the hall computer 262, the first value set in the signal output management counter 203c is the first value. A value corresponding to the sum of the period (the output period of the first entrance passage signal) and the second period (the subsequent OFF period) is set, and the hall computer 262 is provided with such a characteristic. The control load of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 can be reduced with the output of the first entrance passage signal.

  The RAM 203 includes, in addition to the buffers and counters described above, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and values of various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which is stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 and data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (see FIG. 8), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 7). The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When the power is turned off, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 82, various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), a specific prize. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing forward and closing the opening and closing drive of the opening and closing plate of the opening 65a, a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and an external output terminal plate 261 are connected.

  The external output terminal plate 261 is configured to be connectable to the hall computer 262. The external output terminal board 261 receives data (setting data stored in the external output buffer 203 a) output from the main control device 110 and relays the data to the hall computer 262.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has an external output buffer (not shown). The external output buffer in the payout control device 111 has a predetermined size (for example, 1) to be output to the hall computer 262 via the external output terminal board 261 similarly to the external output buffer 203a provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing setting data of (byte), and includes a plurality of setting data bits (for example, setting data bits for a prize ball signal indicating whether or not a predetermined number of prize balls have been paid out).

  The RAM 213, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags, counters, and I / Os. A work area (work area) in which values such as O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed, and the information of the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, the external output terminal board 261 and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The external output terminal board 261 to which the hall computer 262 can be connected as described above stores data output from the payout control device 111 (setting data stored in an external output buffer (not shown)). And relays the data to the hall computer 262.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so as to have a launching strength of the ball according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when a command to launch the ball is issued by the main control device 110. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and corresponds to the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 on the condition that the firing stop switch for stopping the firing is not operated. Then, the firing solenoid is excited, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off lights in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34), and controls the display control device 114. The setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 to be performed is controlled. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225.

  The display control device 114 controls the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a ROM (program ROM) 232, a work RAM 233, a video RAM 234, a character ROM 235, an image controller 236, an input port 237, an output port 238, and bus lines 239 and 240. It has. The input side of the input port 237 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 237 is connected to the MPU 231, the ROM 232, the work RAM 233, and the image controller 236. A video RAM 234 and a character ROM 235 are connected to the image controller 236, and an output port 238 is connected via a bus line 240. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 238. Note that the pachinko machine 10 is a model having the same design as the design displayed on the third symbol display device 81, even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model having different jackpot lottery probabilities and different numbers of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot. Therefore, the display control device 114 is used as a common component to reduce cost.

  The MPU 231 of the display control device 114 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the symbol display command input from the audio lamp control device 113. The ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data. The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various programs.

  The character ROM 235 has a character information memory (not shown) in which character information such as a symbol (background symbol or decorative symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored. The character information stored in the character information memory (not shown) includes numerical data (for example, 0 to 9) of a third symbol that is variably displayed, and symbol data other than numeric data (for example, a symbol of a box or a helmet). A design (see FIG. 5B), a background design, a notice character design or a character design (for example, a boy (see FIG. 5B)).

  Each piece of character information stored in the character information memory 235a is stored as compressed data in order to reduce the amount of data to be stored. In this embodiment, the character information is composed of approximately 1024 Mbytes, and the approximately 1024 Mbytes of character information are compressed to approximately 768 Mbytes and stored in the character information memory. The character information stored in the character information memory as data in a compressed format is read and decompressed, and then written to a character information storage area (not shown) in the video RAM 234.

  The video RAM 234 has a display storage area (not shown) for storing effect data corresponding to display contents (effect patterns of variable display, effect contents at the time of reach effect, etc.) displayed on the third symbol display device 81. And a character information storage area (not shown) for storing character information read from the character information memory of the character ROM 235 and then decompressed.

  The display storage area (not shown) is an area for storing the effect data displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By rewriting the contents of the display memory area, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is performed. The contents are changed. The character information storage area stores character information (character data) serving as a material such as a background design or a decorative design. Data necessary for display on the third symbol display device 81 is stored from the character information storage area. The data is read and written to the display storage area in the video RAM 234.

  The reason for storing the character information in the character information storage area of the video RAM 234 is that the processing speed of the RAM is generally higher than that of the ROM, and the character information is directly displayed from the character ROM 235 on the display in the video RAM 234. If writing directly to the storage area, if the amount of data to be read is large, it takes time to read, and smooth display cannot be performed or clear display cannot be performed. Further, it is because processing of display data (for example, changing the size of a decorative pattern or changing the color of a background pattern) in the video RAM 234 is easy.

  The image controller 236 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 231, the video RAM 234, and the output port 238 to intervene in the reading and writing of data, and reads out the display data stored in the video RAM 234 at a predetermined timing to read out the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And a switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute the NMI interrupt process (not shown), store the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 and the RAM 213, and complete the process.

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 is pressed. The main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 clear each backup data when the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and cause the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data. A payout initialization command is transmitted to the payout control device 111.

  Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a diagram for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 5A is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 5B is a diagram exemplifying an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9" and one type of petal-shaped sub-type formed smaller than the main symbols. Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers from “0” to “9” on the rear symbol made of a wooden box, and the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are Large numbers are added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) are provided with an accessory design imitating a character such as a furoshiki, a helmet, etc., with a talisman covering almost the front of the wooden box, An even number is added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so as to be small in green and displayed in front of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed, and a big hit occurs after the variable display ends. It is configured as follows. When shifting to the high-probability state (probable change state) after the end of the jackpot, a fluctuation display is performed in which main symbols (corresponding to “high-probability symbols”) to which odd numbers are added are aligned. On the other hand, when the state shifts to the low-probability state after the end of the big hit, a fluctuation display is performed in which the main symbols (corresponding to “low-probability symbols”) to which even-numbered numbers are aligned are provided. Here, the high-probability state refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as added value after the jackpot ends, that is, a so-called probability change (probable change). The normal state (low-probability state) refers to a state in which the probability of success is not constant, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the probability of success is lower than that in the case of probability change.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into upper and lower parts, and the lower two-thirds are main display areas Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed. The upper third is a sub-display area Ds for displaying a notice effect and a character.

  In the main display area Dm, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 of left, middle, and right are displayed. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. For this reason, a total of 20 third symbols of 10 main symbols and 10 sub symbols are set in each symbol row, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is scrolled from top to bottom with periodicity. The variable display is performed. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, a third symbol is displayed in three stages of upper, middle, and lower for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 displays a total of nine third symbols in three rows and three columns. In the main display area Dm, five effective lines, that is, an upper line L1, a middle line L2, a lower line L3, a rising line L4, and a rising line L5 are set. Then, in each game, the variable display stops in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and at the time of the stop, the combination of the big hit symbols on any of the activated lines (in the present embodiment, the same Big hits) is displayed as a big hit.

  The sub display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is equally divided into three notice areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Here, the left and right notice areas Ds1 and Ds3 are usually covered with a double-sided opaque door that is electrically opened and closed by a solenoid (not shown). When opened, the display area becomes visible to the player. The center notice area Ds2 is a display area that is always visible without being covered by the door.

  As shown in FIG. 5B, on the actual display screen, a total of nine main symbols and three sub symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, the left and right doors are closed, and the left and right notice areas Ds1 and Ds3 are covered and hidden, so that the display screen cannot be viewed. If one or both of the left and right doors are opened during the change display, a moving image is displayed in the left and right notice areas Ds1 and Ds3, and the player is informed that the state is easier to transition to the big hit than usual. It is suggested. In the center notice area Ds2, normally, a predetermined character (a boy with a hachimaki in the present embodiment) performs a predetermined operation, sometimes performs a special operation different from the predetermined operation, or a different character is displayed. And an announcement performance is performed. Although the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is divided into upper and lower display areas Dm and Ds in principle, the third symbol and characters are displayed larger across the display areas Dm and Ds. A display effect can be performed.

  Next, a counter provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform a jackpot lottery, display setting of the first symbol display device 37, lottery of a display result of the second symbol display device 82, and the like.

  For setting the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37, a first random number counter C1 used for a jackpot lottery, a first hit type symbol counter C2 used for selecting a jackpot symbol, and a stop pattern selection counter C3, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the first random number counter C1, and fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 used for selecting a fluctuation pattern are used. In addition, a second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 82, and a second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated at an interval of 4 ms, which is an execution interval of the main process (see FIG. 8), or at an interval of 2 ms, which is an execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 11). The updated value is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The data is appropriately stored in the counter buffer. The RAM 203 is provided with a reserved ball storage area including one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas). Each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored in synchronization with the ball winning timing.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by one, for example, in the range of 0 to 738 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 738). In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1. Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 738), and each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 11) is executed. It is updated once and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 8). The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 is set at the timing when the ball has won the first entrance 64. Is stored in The number of random hit values at the time of low probability and the high probability are set at two types. The number of random numbers at the time of low probability is two, and the value is “373,727”. Yes, the number of random number values that will be a big hit at a high probability is 14, and the value is "59, 109, 163, 211, 263, 317, 367, 421, 479, 523, 631, 683, 733".

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 at the time of a big hit. In the present embodiment, the first hit type counter C2 is added one by one in a range of 0 to 4 to obtain a maximum value (that is, a maximum value). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching 4). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. Is stored in Note that the value of the random number that becomes the high probability state after the big hit is “1, 2, 3”, the value of the random number that becomes the low probability state after the big hit is “0, 4”, and two types of the hit types are determined. You. Therefore, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is a display mode corresponding to two types of jackpots, a high probability state and a low probability state, and a display mode corresponding to a loss. Any one of the three types of display modes is selected.

  The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one, for example, in the range of 0 to 238, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 238). In the present embodiment, the effect pattern displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop pattern selection counter C3, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol and stopped. "Reach out of front and rear" (for example, in the range of 0 to 8), and "reach other than front and rear out of reach" (for example, in the range of 9 to 38) in which the final stop symbol stops at locations other than the front and rear of the reach symbol after the same reach occurs. Three stop (effect) patterns of "completely out of range" (for example, in the range of 39 to 238) in which no reach occurs are selected. The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and is stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. Is stored.

  The stop pattern selection counter C3 is provided with a plurality of tables having different ranges of random numbers from which the stop pattern is selected. This depends on whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high-probability state or the low-probability state, in which area of the reserved ball storage area each random number value is stored (that is, the number of reserved), and the like. This is for changing the selection ratio of the stop pattern.

  For example, in the high-probability state, a table in which the range of the random value corresponding to the stop pattern of “completely out” is as large as 10 to 238 is selected so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because the jackpot is likely to occur, It becomes easy to select "completely out of order". In this table, the “reach out of front and rear” is narrowed to 0 to 5 and the “reach other than front and rear out” is also narrowed to 6 to 9, making it difficult to select “reach out of front and rear” or “reach other than front and rear out”. Further, if the random numbers are not stored in the reserved ball storage area in the low probability state, in order to secure the ball entry time to the first entry port 64, the disturbance corresponding to the "completely out" stop pattern is required. A table whose numerical value range is as narrow as 51 to 238 is selected, and it is difficult to select “completely out of range”. In this table, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop pattern of “reach other than front and rear out” is widened to 9 to 50, and “reach other than front and back out” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, the ball entry time of the ball into the first entrance 64 can be ensured, so that the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is easily performed continuously.

  Of the two variation type counters CS1 and CS2, one variation type counter CS1 is configured to be added one by one in the range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The other variation type counter CS2 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 240, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 240). In the following description, CS1 is also referred to as “first variation type counter”, and CS2 is also referred to as “second variation type counter”.

  A rough display mode such as so-called normal reach, super reach, premium reach, and the like is determined by the first variation type counter CS1. The determination of the display mode is, specifically, the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Further, the fluctuation time (in other words, the number of fluctuation symbols) until the final stop symbol (the middle symbol in this embodiment) stops after the occurrence of the reach is determined by the second fluctuation type counter CS2. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, the display control device 114 determines the reach type and the fine symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third display device 81. Therefore, by combining these variation type counters CS1 and CS2, a variety of variation patterns can be easily realized. It is also possible to determine the symbol variation mode only by the first variation type counter CS1, or to determine the symbol variation mode by a combination of the first variation type counter CS1 and the stop symbol. The values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 8) described later is executed once, and are repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process.

  The value of the variation type counter CS3 is, for example, added one by one in the range of 0 to 162, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 162). In the following description, CS3 is also referred to as “third variation type counter”. The third symbol display device 81 according to the present embodiment performs a decorative effect according to the display mode of the first symbol display device 37. In addition to the variation of the symbol, the third symbol display device 81 slides a fluctuating symbol, An announcement effect such as passing a notice character for announcing the occurrence of the reach effect is performed. The effect pattern of the announcement effect is selected by the variation type counter CS3. More specifically, an effect pattern that does not add or subtract the time required for the notice effect to the fluctuation time, or subtracts the fluctuation time to shorten the time of fluctuation display, or selects the fluctuation time is selected. . In addition, similarly to the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS3 is provided with a plurality of tables having different ranges of random numbers from which the effect pattern is selected, and determines whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state. The selection ratio of each effect pattern is configured to be different depending on whether it is in the low probability state, in which area of the reserved ball storage area each random number value is stored, and the like.

  As described above, the variation time of the symbol variation is determined by the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, and the time to be added to or subtracted from the variation time is determined by the variation type counter CS3. Therefore, the final variation time until the final stop symbol stops is determined by the variation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as, for example, a loop counter which is sequentially incremented by one in a range of 0 to 250, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 250). In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt processing, and it is detected that the ball has passed through the left or right second entrance (through gate) 67. Obtained when done. The number of random number values to be won is 149, and the range is “5 to 153”. The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is executed once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 11). It is updated and updated repeatedly within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 8).

  Next, control processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process started upon power-on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer allocation started periodically (in the present embodiment, at a period of 2 ms). Interrupt processing and the above-described NMI interrupt processing.

  First, with reference to FIG. 7, a start-up process when the main controller 110 is turned on will be described. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S101). More specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer, and the control devices on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) are set in an operable state. In order to wait, a wait process (1 second in the present embodiment) is executed. Next, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S103).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided on the power supply 115 is turned on (S104). If it is turned on (S104: Yes), the process proceeds to S111. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S104: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105), and if not, it is not stored (S105: No). Since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power shutdown may not have been completed normally, the processing also shifts to S111 in this case.

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S106). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S107: No), that is, the calculated RAM determination If the value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also proceeds to S111 in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the process of S213 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S111, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S111). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game balls. After transmitting the pay-out initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process of RAM 203 (S112, S113).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 123. Therefore, if the RAM erasure switch 123 is pressed at the time of execution of the startup processing, the RAM initialization processing (S112, S113) is executed. Similarly, the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S112, S113) is executed also when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the initialization processing of the RAM (S112, S113), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S112), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S113). After the execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S110.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 123 is not turned on (S104: No), power-off occurrence information is stored (S105: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal (S104: No), S107: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S108). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of drive power cutoff is transmitted (S109), and the process proceeds to S110. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 enters a state in which the payout control of the game balls can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213. In the process of S110, the interruption is permitted, and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 8, a description will be given of a main process executed after the above-described startup process. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline, each of the processes in S201 to S206 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter updating process in S209 and S210 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, output data such as a command updated in the previous processing is transmitted (output) to each of the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices) and the hall computer 262 via the external output terminal board 261. (S201). By this external output processing (S201), for example, it is determined whether or not there is prize detection information detected by the switch reading processing of S501 (see FIG. 11). Is transmitted. In addition, by this external output processing (S201), a variation pattern command, a stop symbol command, a stop command, an effect time addition command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When transmitting or launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

  Also, by the external output process (S201), the data (setting data) set in the external output buffer 203a in accordance with the playing state in the external information processing (see FIG. 13) to be described later via the external output terminal board 261. And outputs it to the hall computer 262.

  Each of the setting data bits constituting the setting data includes a setting data bit that is set to 1 (turned on) when a ball enters the first entrance 64, and this setting data bit is set. One first entrance passage signal is formed according to the output state of the data bit.

  Specifically, the 1st entrance passage signal of 1 is such that the output state of the corresponding setting data bit is inverted from 0 (off), which is the initial state, to 1 (on), and thereafter (in the present embodiment, 52 ms) After that, when the output state is returned to 0 (off) again, it is output to the hall computer 262 via the external output terminal board 261.

  Similarly, each setting data bit constituting the setting data stored in the external output buffer 203a includes a setting data bit which is set to 1 when a big hit occurs. , A large hit signal is formed. That is, the output state of the corresponding setting data bit is inverted from 0 (off) to 1 (on) with the occurrence of the jackpot, and the output state is returned to 0 (off) again with the end of the jackpot. 1 is output to the hall computer 262 via the external output terminal board 261.

  Next, the values of the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are updated (S202). Specifically, the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are incremented by one, and are cleared to 0 when their counter values reach the maximum values (198, 240, and 162 in this embodiment). Then, the updated values of the variation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S203), and the process for displaying by the first symbol display device 37 and the second process are performed. A variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the three symbol display device 81 is executed (S204). The details of the fluctuation processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the end of the fluctuation process, a large opening opening / closing process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 in the case of the big hit state is executed (S205). In other words, the specific winning opening 65a is opened in each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning opening 65a. When any one of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of rounds.

  Next, display control processing of a second symbol (for example, a symbol of “○” or “X”) by the second symbol display device 82 is executed (S206). Briefly, on condition that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained at the timing of passing, and the second symbol display device 82 Of the second symbol is displayed on the display unit 83. Then, the lottery of the second symbol is performed based on the value of the second random number counter C4, and when the second symbol hits, the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S207). If power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S207: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 sends a power failure signal. SG1 is not output, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S208). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S208: Yes), the process proceeds to S201, and the above-described processes from S201 onward are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous main processing (S208: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing is reached. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 are repeatedly updated (S209, S210).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S209). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (738, 250 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively.

  Next, the change type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are updated (S210). Specifically, the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are incremented by one, and are cleared to 0 when their counter values reach the maximum values (198, 240, and 162 in this embodiment). Then, the updated values of the variation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively.

  Here, the execution time of each processing of S201 to S206 changes according to the state of the game, so the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4), and the variation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 can also be updated at random.

  In addition, in the process of S207, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S207: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, the NMI interrupt processing (not shown) has been executed, so that the processing at the time of power shutdown after S211 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S211), and a power shutdown notification command indicating that the power has been shut down is sent to another control device (a peripheral control device such as the payout control device 111 or the sound lamp control device 113). The message is transmitted (S212). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S213), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S214), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  Note that the processing of S207 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S201 to S206 or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S209 and S210 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. It can be started from the processing of S201. That is, the process can be started from the process of S201, similarly to the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not stored, the stack pointer is not reset in the initialization process (S101). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S201. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without malfunction or runaway of main controller 110.

  Next, the fluctuation processing (S204) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation processing (S204) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 8). In this fluctuation processing, first, it is determined whether or not a big hit is currently occurring (S301). The big hit is included during the big hit game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the big hit and during the predetermined time after the big hit game ends. If the result of the determination is that the jackpot is being hit (S301: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not during the big hit (S301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing. (S302: No), it is determined whether or not the number N of operation pending balls is larger than 0 (S303). If the number N of operation-reserved balls is 0 (S303: No), the present process is terminated as it is. If the number of active balls N> 0 (S303: Yes), the number N of active balls is subtracted by 1 (S304), and the data stored in the reserved ball storage area is shifted (S305). This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the reserved ball storage area to the execution area side, and includes a first reserved area → an execution area, a second reserved area → The data in each area is shifted in the order of the first reserved area, the third reserved area → the second reserved area, the fourth reserved area → the third reserved area, and so on. After the data shift processing, a fluctuation start processing of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S306). The change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S302, when it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the changing time has elapsed (S307). The display time during the fluctuation of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 and the addition time selected by the fluctuation type counter CS3. If it has not elapsed (S307: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S308).

  In the present embodiment, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED.If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, a display mode for turning on the red LED is set.

  Note that the fluctuation process is executed every 4 ms. However, if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the fluctuation process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by one every time the fluctuation process is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. When the counter reaches 100, the LED is turned on. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  On the other hand, if the fluctuating time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S307: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S309). The setting of the stop symbol is determined as to whether or not a large hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1. It is determined whether the symbol is in the low probability state. In the present embodiment, a red LED is turned on when a high probability state is set after a jackpot, a green LED is turned on when a low probability state is set, and a blue LED is turned on when the state is off. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stopped symbol is set in the process of S309, the fluctuation stop of the third symbol display device 81 is stopped to synchronize with the lighting of the LED in the first symbol display device 37. A command is set (S310). When receiving the stop command, the sound lamp control device 113 instructs the display control device 114 to stop. The variation of the third symbol display device 81 stops after the variation time elapses, and the variation effect of 1 in the third symbol display device 81 ends by receiving the stop command.

  Next, the change start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start processing (S306) executed in the fluctuation processing (see FIG. 9). In the change start process (S306), first, it is determined whether or not a big hit has occurred based on the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area (S401). Whether or not a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the mode at that time. As described above, during normal low probability, “373,727” is a hit value among numerical values 0 to 738 of the first random number counter C1, and at high probability, “59, 109, 163, 211, 263, 317, 367, 421, 479, 523, 631, 683, 733 "are the winning values.

  If it is determined that the hit is a big hit (S401: Yes), the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is confirmed, and the display mode at the time of the big hit is set (S402). ). In the process of S402, whether to shift to the high probability state or the low probability state after the big hit is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2. When the transition state after the big hit is set, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set. Further, based on the transition state after the jackpot, a jackpot stop symbol stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. That is, the stop symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is set by setting the transition state after the big hit in the process of S402. Note that, among the numerical values 0 to 4 of the first hit type counter C2, if the value is "0, 4", the state shifts to the low probability state, and if the value is "1, 2, 3", the state shifts to the high probability state. .

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S403). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S403, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the big hit symbol is determined. You. At this time, the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 are checked, and rough symbol variations such as normal reach, super reach, and premium reach are determined based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1. In addition to determining the fluctuation time, the fluctuation time (in other words, the number of fluctuation symbols) until the final stop symbol (in this embodiment, the middle symbol Z2) stops after the occurrence of the reach is determined based on the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2. I do.

  Note that the relationship between the value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the variation time and the relationship between the value of the second variation type counter CS2 and the variation time are defined in advance by a table or the like. However, the fluctuation time can be set using only the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 without using the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2, and can be set only by the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1. Whether to perform the setting or to set both values of both the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 is appropriately determined in accordance with the value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the game condition each time.

  If it is determined in the processing of S401 that the hit is not a big hit (S401: No), a display mode at the time of departure is set (S404). In the process of S404, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area. The effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set to reach out of front / rear, reach other than front / rear out, or complete out of reach. In the present embodiment, as described above, the range of the value corresponding to each stop pattern of the stop pattern selection counter C3 differs depending on whether the state is the high probability state, the low probability state, and the number of operation suspensions N. So the table is set.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of departure is determined (S405), the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the departure symbol. Is determined. At this time, as in the process of S403, the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 are checked, and based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1, normal reach, super reach, and premium reach are performed. And the like, and based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2, the variation time (in other words, the middle symbol Z2 in the present embodiment) until the final stop symbol (the middle symbol Z2) stops after the occurrence of the reach. , Fluctuating symbols).

  When the processing of S403 or the processing of S405 is completed, an effect time to be added to or subtracted from the fluctuation time determined by the first and second type counters CS1 and CS2 is determined (S406). At this time, the addition or subtraction of the rendering time is determined based on the value of the third type counter CS3 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display is performed. The fluctuation time of the device 81 is set. In the present embodiment, the addition and subtraction of the rendering time is determined according to the value of the third variation type counter CS3, when the variation display time is not changed, when the variation display time is added by 1 second, and when the variation display time is added by 2 seconds. In the case of addition, four types of addition values are determined, including the case where the variable display time is subtracted by 1 second.

  In the case where the variable display time is added or subtracted, a notice effect in which the expected value of the jackpot is increased in the third symbol display device 81 (for example, a slip effect in which the variable symbol is made longer than usual and the slip is accompanied by a slip effect, or the like) An effect of displaying an advance notice character, an effect of shortening the fluctuation time of a fluctuating symbol shorter than usual, and immediately stopping, and the like are performed. When the value of the first random number counter C1 is a big hit, the probability that the added value of 2 seconds is selected is set to be high, so that the player can expect the big hit by confirming the announcement effect. Can be.

  Next, a variation pattern command is set in accordance with the variation pattern (variation time) determined in the process of S403 or S405 (S407), and a stop symbol command is set in accordance with the stop symbol set in the process of S402 or S404. (S408). Then, an effect time addition command is set according to the effect time addition value determined in the process of S406 (S409), and the process returns to the fluctuation process.

  Next, FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing. This timer interrupt process is executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, for example, every 2 ms. In the timer interrupt processing, first, various pay switches are read (S501). That is, the state of the various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store the detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S502). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches a maximum value (738 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first random number counter C1, first type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and second random number counter C4 are updated (S503). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are maximum values (in this embodiment, When they reach 738, 4, 238, and 250, respectively, they are cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  After that, a start winning process (see FIG. 12) accompanying the winning in the first entrance 64 is executed (S504), and the external information for setting the first entrance passing signal to be output to the hall computer 262 is set. The process (see FIG. 13) is executed (S505), the firing control process is executed (S505), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor, and turns on / off the firing of the ball on condition that the firing stop switch for stopping the firing is not operated. This is the process of determining OFF. When the launch of the ball is on, main controller 110 instructs launch control device 112 to launch the ball.

  Here, the start winning process executed in the process of S504 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S504) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 11).

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball opening 64 (start winning) (S601). When it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S601: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the first entrance passage counter 203b (S602).

  After the processing of S602, it is determined whether or not the number N of pending balls of the first symbol display device 37 is less than an upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S603). If there is a prize in the first entrance 64 and if the number of active balls N <4 (S603: Yes), the number N of active balls is incremented by 1 (S604) and further updated in step S503. The values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are stored in the first of the free reserved areas of the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 (S605). On the other hand, whether there is no prize in the first entrance 64 (S601: No), or even if there is a prize in the first entrance 64, the number of active balls is not N <4 (S603: No). , S604 and S605 are skipped, the start winning process ends, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  Next, the external information processing executed in the processing of S505 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the external information processing (S505) executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 11).

  As shown in FIG. 13, in this external information processing (S505), first, the external output buffer 203a is cleared to 0, that is, all the setting data bits are cleared to 0, and the setting data is cleared (S1501).

  After the processing in S1501, it is checked whether the value of the signal output management counter 203c is 0 (S1502). If the value of the signal output management counter 203c is 0 (S1502: Yes) as a result of the confirmation in S1502, the hall computer 262 is in a state where the next first incoming ball passing signal can be distinguished (detectable). In this case, it is checked whether the value of the first entrance passage counter 203b is 0 (S1503).

  As a result of the check in S1503, if the value of the first entrance passage counter 203b is not 0, that is, if a value larger than 0 is confirmed (S1502: No), the ball to the first entrance 64 is confirmed. This is a case where there is a first entrance passage signal that has not been output to the hall computer 262 (not transmitted, waiting) even though the passage of the first entrance has been detected. Therefore, in such a case, after subtracting 1 from the value of the first entrance passage counter 203b (S1504), 52 is set as an initial value in the signal output management counter 203c (S1505), and the time is counted by the signal output management counter 203c. Start (measurement).

  When 52 is set as an initial value in the signal output management counter 203c as a result of the processing of S1505, thereafter, this external information processing (S505) is executed until the value of the signal output management counter 203c becomes 0. Then, the processing of S1509 is executed, and each time it is decremented by one. Since this external information processing (S505) is one of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 11) executed at intervals of 2 ms, 52 is set as the initial value in the signal output management counter 203c. As a result, a period of 104 ms is measured.

  On the other hand, if the value of the signal output management counter 203c is not 0 as a result of the confirmation in the processing of S1502, that is, if a value larger than 0 is confirmed (S1502: No), the signal output management counter 203c is counting time. Therefore, the value of the signal output management counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S1509).

  After the processing in S1505 or S1509, it is checked whether the value of the signal output management counter 203c is larger than 26 (S1506). If the value of the signal output management counter 203c is larger than 26 (S1506: Yes), the first ball entry is made. Since the first period (52 ms in this embodiment), which is the output period of the first entrance opening signal, has not yet elapsed since the start of the output of the opening passage signal, the first period in the external output buffer 203a has not yet elapsed. The setting data bit corresponding to the entrance passage signal is set to 1 (S1507), and the process proceeds to other setting processing (S1508).

  With the setting data bit corresponding to the first entrance passage signal in the external output buffer 203a set to 1 as a result of the processing in S1507, the external output processing (S201) in the main processing (see FIG. 8) in the next cycle. ) Is executed, a first entrance opening signal, which is an ON signal, is output to the hall computer 262 via the external output terminal board 261.

  On the other hand, as a result of checking in S1506, if the value of the signal output management counter 203c is 26 or less (S1506: No), the output period of the first entrance passage signal has ended, and thus S1507. , And the process proceeds to other setting processing (S1508).

  Here, as described above, every time the external information processing (S505) is executed, first, the processing of S1501 is executed, and the external output buffer 203a is cleared to 0, so the branch processing of No in S1506 is executed. As a result, if S1507 is skipped, the output state of the setting data bit corresponding to the first entrance passage signal remains at 0 (off). Therefore, when the branching process of No in S1506 is performed, the external output process (S201) in the main process (see FIG. 8) of the next cycle is not the first entrance passage signal (ON signal), The signal in the off state is output to the hall computer 262 via the external output terminal board 261.

  Therefore, according to the external information processing (S505), when the Yes branch processing in S1506 is executed, that is, after the output of the first entrance passage signal is started, the first entrance passage signal of the first entrance passage signal is started. Until the first period, which is the output period, elapses, the process of S1507 is executed. As a result, the hall computer 262 passes through the first entrance through the first period (52 ms in the present embodiment). A signal will be output.

  On the other hand, if the branching process of No in S1506 is performed, 1507 is skipped, and the second period is set as the off period after the first entrance passage signal is output over the first period. A period, that is, a period (52 ms in the present embodiment) in which the hall computer 262 can distinguish the adjacent first entrance entrance signals in chronological order is measured.

  If the value of the first entrance passage counter 203b is 0 as a result of the check in S1503 (S1502: Yes), the first entrance being counted (managed) by the signal output management counter 203c. Since there is neither a passing signal nor a first entrance port passing signal to be output, the flow directly proceeds to other setting processing (S1508).

  In the other setting processing (S1508), setting data bits corresponding to signals other than the first entrance passage signal (for example, a signal during a big hit) in the external output buffer 203a are updated. After the execution of the other setting process (S1508), the external information processing (S505) ends, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  As described above, in the external information processing (S505) executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the first first entrance passage signal is output to the hall computer 262, the first entrance passage signal is output. A value corresponding to a total period (104 ms in the present embodiment) of the first period, which is the output period, and the second period after the completion of the output of the first entrance passage signal is set as the initial value, and the signal output is performed. The management counter 203c is set so that both of these periods (the first period and the second period) can be managed by only one counter signal output management counter 203c.

  A first advantage of such a configuration is that it is not necessary to separately prepare a counter for measuring the first period and a counter for measuring the second period, thereby suppressing consumption of storage capacity in the RAM 203. The point that can be.

  As a second advantage, the value corresponding to each period is not set in the signal output management counter 203c at the timing of starting the timing of each period (the first period or the second period), and two periods (the first period or the second period) are not set. And the second period), the control load on the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 can be reduced with the output of the first entrance passage signal to the hall computer 262. Can be

  According to the external information processing (S505), the number of states in which the ball has passed through the first entrance 64 but the first entrance passage signal corresponding to the passage has not been output (waiting) is: When the value of the counter 203b is 1 or more, when the signal output management counter 203c becomes 0, the Yes branching process in S1503 is executed. Then, the output of the next first entrance opening signal which has been waiting is started.

  That is, if the ball has passed through the first entrance opening 64 but the first entrance passage signal cannot be output immediately because the first entrance passage signal was being output, the output is being performed. After the first entrance passage signal ends, the first entrance passage signal is further transmitted until a second period during which the hall computer 262 can detect the next first entrance passage signal has elapsed. Output is waited for. As a result, the hall computer 262 can reliably discriminate (detect) the individual first entrance port passing signals, and the passage (winning) of the ball to the first entrance port 64, which is detected every moment, The hall computer 262 can be made to surely recognize.

  Next, referring to FIG. 14, a first entrance passage signal (the output state of the corresponding setting data bit in external output buffer 203a is 1) output from pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment to hall computer 262. ) Will be described. FIG. 14 is a timing chart showing the output timing of the first entrance passage signal in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 14, a detection signal sg1 (ON signal) indicating that a ball has passed through the first entrance 64 is output from the first entrance switch (part of the various switches 208), that is, When the passage of the ball to the first entrance 64 is detected by the first entrance switch, the corresponding setting data bit in the external output buffer 203a is inverted from 0 to 1, and the detection signal sg1 of 1 (that is, 1) The output of one first entrance opening signal ON1 for one winning) is started.

  When the output of the first entrance passage signal ON1 is started, the process of S1505 in the external information processing (see FIG. 13) is executed, and an initial value is set in the signal output management counter 203c.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the initial value set in the signal output management counter 203c is such that the output period of the first entrance passage signal ON1 and the hall computer 262 can distinguish the next first entrance passage signal. It is a value corresponding to the total period (104 ms in this embodiment) with the off period OF1.

  During the time counting of the period by the signal output management counter 203c, it is determined that the output period (52 ms in the present embodiment) of the first entrance passage signal has elapsed by the determination processing of S1506 in the external information processing (see FIG. 13). Then, by returning the corresponding setting data bit in the external output buffer 203a from 1 to 0, the output of the first entrance passage signal ON1 ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a value corresponding to 104 ms, which is a total period of the output period of the first entrance passage signal ON1 and the OFF period OF1, is set as the initial value in the signal output management counter 203c. Even when the signal output management counter 203c measures the output period of 52 ms, the value of the signal output management counter 203c does not reach 0. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the signal output management counter 203c sets an initial value for measuring the OFF period OF1 even after the output of the first entrance passage signal ON1 ends. Without this, the off-period OF1 (52 ms in the present embodiment) can be continuously measured.

  On the other hand, before the value of the signal output management counter 203c in which the initial value has been set with the start of the output of the first entrance passage signal ON1 reaches 0, that is, in the present embodiment, the first entrance entrance. If a new detection signal sg2 is output from the first entrance switch before 104 ms elapses from the start of the output of the passing signal ON1, it waits until the value of the signal output management counter 203c reaches 0. After that, the output of the first entrance opening signal ON2 for the detection signal sg2 is started.

  That is, the first entrance passage signal ON2 for the detection signal sg2 is set in advance so that the hall computer 262 can distinguish the first entrance passage signal ON2 after the output of the first entrance passage signal ON1 ends. The output is on standby until the OFF period OF1 has elapsed. As described above, since the first entrance entrance signal ON2 is output after the OFF period OF1 has elapsed after the output of the first entrance entrance signal ON1 has been completed, the hall computer 262 outputs the first entrance entrance signal ON2. The passing signal ON2 can be reliably detected.

  When the output of the first entrance passage signal ON2 is started, similarly to the case of the first entrance passage signal ON1, the signal output management counter 203c stores the first entrance passage signal. A value corresponding to the total period of the ON period and the OFF period OF2 is set as an initial value, and a new detection signal is sent from the first entrance switch before the value of the signal output management counter 203c reaches 0. When the first entrance entrance passage signal corresponding to the new detection signal is output, the first entrance entrance passage signal corresponding to the new detection signal is output after the off-period OF2 has elapsed after the end of the output of the first entrance entrance passage signal ON2. Become.

  On the other hand, when a new detection signal sg3 is output from the first entrance switch after the value of the signal output management counter 203c becomes 0, the initial value is set in the signal output management counter 203c, The output of the first entrance passage signal ON3 for the detection signal sg3 is started.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when outputting the first entrance passage signal to the hall computer 262, the output of the first entrance passage signal (ON signal) is started. , The timing of the period is started. After the start of the timing, it is first determined whether or not a first period, which is the signal output period, has elapsed. If it is determined that the first period has elapsed, the first period is determined. Subsequent to the timing, the hall computer 262 counts a second period, which is an off period in which the adjacent first entrance signal can be distinguished in chronological order. Then, in order to determine the arrival of the second period, it is determined whether the second period has elapsed, that is, from the output of the first entrance passage signal, the first period and the second period are determined. A determination is made as to whether the summation period has elapsed.

  Therefore, the management of the output period of the first entrance passage signal (ie, the first output period) and the off period after the output of the first entrance passage signal (ie, the second output period) is completed. The management can be realized without setting the time period to be measured according to the timing of starting the time measurement in each period. Therefore, the control load applied to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 can be reduced with the output of the first entrance passage signal that is output each time a ball passes (wins) to the first entrance 64.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the output of the first entrance passage signal is started, the value corresponding to the sum period of the first period and the second period is signal output as an initial value. By setting the value in the management counter 203c and counting down every predetermined time, the one counter (signal output management counter 203c) counts both the first period and the second period.

  Therefore, there is no need to separately prepare a counter for measuring the first period and a counter for measuring the second period, and it is possible to suppress the consumption of storage capacity in the RAM 203.

  In the first embodiment, a first period preset as an output period of the first entrance passage signal and a second period preset as an off period after the end of the output of the first entrance passage signal are set. Although the periods are configured as the same value (52 ms), these periods are not limited to the same. Even if the first period is longer than the second period, the first period is The period may be shorter than the second period.

  Here, by setting the first period and the second period to the same or substantially the same value, management of each period can be facilitated. In particular, the second period is defined as the shortest period in which the hall computer 262 can distinguish the adjacent first entrance passage signals in chronological order, or a nearby period longer than the shortest period (for example, the shortest period %), The first period and the second period have the same or substantially the same value, so that there is an unoutputted (standby) first entrance passage signal. The timing at which the ball passed through the first entrance opening 64 (the timing at which the ball was detected by the first entrance switch) and the output of the first entrance passage signal which is waiting and is to be output next The difference from the timing can be reduced. Therefore, the time required for the output period and the output OFF period can be shortened as a whole with respect to one first entrance passage signal, and the data (the present embodiment illustrating the first entrance passage signal) can be reduced. In the embodiment, the acquisition efficiency of the winning data) can be improved.

  Note that, regardless of whether the length of the first period and the length of the second period are the same or different, the second period is determined by the hall computer 262 in the time series By setting the one entrance passage signal to a distinguishable period, the hall computer 262 can surely detect (discriminate) each of the first entrance passage signals adjacent in time series.

  In addition, regardless of whether the length of the first period and the length of the second period are the same or different, the second period is determined by the hall computer 262 in the time series It is preferable that one entrance ball passing signal has a shortest period that can be distinguished, or a nearby period longer than the shortest period. By setting at least the second period to be the shortest period in which the hall computer 262 can distinguish the first entrance passage signals adjacent in time series or a nearby period longer than the shortest period, When there is a 1 entrance passage signal, the difference between the timing at which the ball passed through the first entrance opening 64 and the output timing of the first entrance passage signal that is waiting and should be output next is reduced. can do. Therefore, the hall computer 262 not only can reliably detect (discriminate) each of the first entrance passage signals adjacent in time series, but also can output the next first entrance passage signal after the output of the first entrance passage signal is completed. The period until the start of the output of the ball passage signal can be reduced to the maximum or almost the maximum, and the data acquisition efficiency can be effectively improved.

  Next, a pachinko machine according to a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The pachinko machine of the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 of the above-described first embodiment are different in the appearance of the game area located at the center of the front face of the game board 13 (see FIGS. 3 and 15). Therefore, the content of the game is different. In the second embodiment, the same parts as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  15 and 16 are front views of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 15 illustrates a case where all of the ten electric auditors 661a, 662a, 663a, 664a, 665a, 691a, 692a, 693a, 694a, and 695a are in the closed position. On the other hand, FIG. 16 illustrates a case where all of the ten electric accessories 661a, 662a, 663a, 664a, 665a, 691a, 692a, 693a, 694a, and 695a are in the open position. In FIG. 16, illustration of a ball guiding nail is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment includes a base plate 60 on which a number of nails for ball guidance (omitted in FIG. 16), windmills and rails 61, 62, The winning opening 601, the upper operating opening 602, the lower operating opening 603, and ten winning units 641, 642, 643, 644, 645, 671, 672, 673, 674, 675, and the like are assembled. Here, the general winning opening 601, the upper working opening 602, the lower working opening 603, and 10 winning units 641, 642, 643, 644, 645, 671, 672, 673, 674, and 675 are the pachinko machines of the first embodiment. Like the first entrance 64 of the machine 10 and the like, it is disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a wood screw or the like.

  As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, a general winning opening 601 is provided in an upper portion of the gaming area of the gaming board 13. In the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment, when a ball is won (entered) in the general winning opening 601, ten balls are paid out as winning balls for one winning.

  Below the general winning opening 601 (the vertical direction in FIGS. 15 and 16), an upper operating opening 602 is provided. In the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the fact that a ball has won the upper stage operating port 602 indicates that an upper stage operating port switch (a part of the various switches 208 shown in FIG. 17) provided on the back side of the upper operating port 602 in the game board 13. ), 10 balls are awarded as prize balls per winning, and the five electric auditors 661a, 662a, 663a, 664a, 665a are simultaneously moved from the closed position (FIG. 15) to the open position (FIG. 15). 16).

  Below the upper operating port 602, five winning units 641, 642, 643, 644, and 645 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIGS. 15 and 16). These winning units 641, 642, 643, 644, and 645 are units configured similarly. In the following, a description will be given using the winning unit 641 as a representative.

  The winning unit 641 is provided at an upper first operating port 651 provided at an upper portion, an upper first winning port 661 provided below the upper first operating port 651, and at an entrance of the upper first winning port 661. It is a unit configured to include the electric accessory 661a. The electric accessory 661a is driven by the upper first winning opening solenoid 210a (see FIG. 17) and is in the closed position (the state shown in FIG. 15) or the open position opened in the left and right direction from the closed position (see FIG. 16). (Indicated state).

  The upper first operating port 651 is configured to be always able to enter a ball, and the fact that a ball has won the upper first operating port 651 is provided on the back side of the upper first operating port 651 in the game board 13. When detected by the first operating port switch (part of the various switches 208 shown in FIG. 17), ten balls are paid out per winning as prize balls, and the electric accessory 661a is moved from the closed position (FIG. 16). It is configured to be shifted to the open position (FIG. 15).

  The upper first winning opening 661 has its front side covered with a cover extending from the front surface of the upper first operating port 651, and is configured so that the passage of a ball is restricted according to the position of the electric accessory 661a. . Specifically, when the electric accessory 661a is at the open position (FIG. 16), the ball can pass (win) to the upper first winning opening 661, but the electric accessory 661a is closed ( In the case of FIG. 15), it is impossible for the ball to pass to the upper first winning opening 661. That is, the upper first winning opening 661 can pass through the ball only when (1) the ball wins in the upper operating port 602 or (2) the ball wins in the upper first operating port 651. .

  The fact that the ball has won the upper first winning opening 661 is determined by the upper first winning opening switch (a part of the various switches 208 shown in FIG. 17) provided on the back side of the upper first winning opening 661 in the game board 13. When detected, ten balls are paid out per winning as prize balls, and the electric accessory 661a is shifted from the open position (FIG. 16) to the closed position (FIG. 15). Therefore, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the closed electric accessory 661a is opened by the passage of the ball to the upper operating port 602 or the upper first operating port 651, and the opened electric accessory 661a is moved upward. The ball is closed again by the winning of the ball into the first winning port 661.

  As for the winning units 642 to 645, in the above description of the winning unit 641, (1) the “upper first operating port 651” is replaced with the upper operating port (upper second to upper fifth operating port) corresponding to the winning unit. 652 to 655), and (2) the "upper first winning opening 661" is replaced with an upper winning opening (upper 2nd to upper 5th winning opening 662 to 665) corresponding to the winning unit. The “winner 661a” is read as an electric auditorium (motor-operated auditors 662a to 665a) corresponding to the winning unit, and (4) the “upper first winning opening solenoid 210a” is replaced with a winning opening solenoid (upper first) corresponding to the winning unit. (5) Replace the “upper first operating port switch” with the upper operating port switch (upper second to upper fifth) corresponding to the winning unit. Work (6) The "upper first winning opening switch" is replaced with an upper winning opening switch (upper second to upper second) corresponding to the winning unit. What is necessary is just to read 5 winning port switches (all are a part of various switches 208 shown in FIG. 17).

  Below the third winning unit 643, a lower operating port 603 is provided. In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, when a ball wins in the lower operating port 603, ten balls are paid out as a prize ball per winning, and five electric auditors 691a, 692a, 693a, 694a, 695a are simultaneously sent. At a time from the closed position (FIG. 15) to the open position (FIG. 16).

  Below the lower operating port 603, five winning units 671, 672, 673, 674, and 675 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. Each of these winning units 671, 672, 673, 674, and 675 is a unit configured similarly to the above-described winning unit 641.

  Therefore, regarding the winning units 671 to 675, (1) the “upper first operating port 651” in the above description of the winning unit 641 is replaced with the lower operating port (lower first to lower fifth operating port) corresponding to the winning unit. (681) to (685), (2) "upper first winning opening 661" is replaced by a lower winning opening (lower first to fifth fifth winning opening 691 to 695) corresponding to the winning unit, and (3) "motorized". The "winner 661a" is read as an electric auditorium (motor-operated 691a to 695a) corresponding to the winning unit. (4) The "upper first winning opening solenoid 210a" is replaced with a lower winning opening solenoid (lower) corresponding to the winning unit. The first to lower fifth winning opening solenoids 210f to 210j (see FIG. 17) are read and (5) the "upper first operating opening switch" is replaced by the lower operating opening switch (lower first to lower first operating switch) corresponding to the winning unit. (6) Replace the “upper first winning port switch” with the lower winning port switch (lower first to lower) corresponding to the winning unit. It may be replaced with a fifth winning opening switch (all of them are a part of various switches 208 shown in FIG. 17).

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine of the second embodiment, all five upper winning ports (upper first to fifth upper winning ports 661 to 665) are in a state where winning is possible by winning a ball to the upper operating port 602. An advantageous gaming state occurs. Similarly, when a ball wins in the lower operating port 603, all five lower winning ports (lower first to fifth lower winning ports 691 to 695) are in a winable state, and the most advantageous gaming state is generated. It will be.

  The pachinko machine of the present embodiment outputs a specific operating port passage signal to the hall computer 262 every time a ball wins in the upper operating port 602 or the lower operating port 603 capable of generating the most advantageous gaming state. It is configured as follows. On the other hand, when the hall computer 262 receives the specific operating port passing signal, the hall computer 262 displays data displayed around the pachinko machine (for example, above the pachinko machine) over the ON period of the received specific operating port passing signal. A control signal is output to make the container blink.

  In the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the output period (ON period) of one specific operation port passage signal is initially set to 30 s. However, as will be described in detail later, when a ball is detected in the upper working port 602 or the lower working port 603 at a relatively short interval, the output period of the specific working port passing signal output during or after the output. Is shorter than the initial set value (30 s in the present embodiment).

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, even when a ball wins in the upper operating port 602 or the lower operating port 603 at relatively short intervals, the winning timing and the output start timing of the specific operating port passing signal (or , The reception timing of the specific operation port passing signal in the hall computer 262).

  FIG. 17 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment. The RAM 203 of the main controller 110 according to the second embodiment includes an external output buffer 203a, a signal output management counter 203c, a specific operating port passage counter 203d, an upper first winning port opening flag 203e, and an upper second winning port. Opening flag 203f, upper third winning opening opening flag 203g, upper fourth winning opening opening flag 203h, upper fifth winning opening opening flag 203i, lower first winning opening opening flag 203j, Lower second winning opening flag 203k, lower third winning opening flag 203l, lower fourth winning opening flag 203m, lower fifth opening flag 203n, and the contents of the internal register of MPU 201 Area where the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 and the like are stored, and values of various flags, counters, I / Os, etc. are stored.憶 is the working area and a (working area).

  The specific operation port passage counter 203d is a counter that counts a state in which a ball has passed through the upper operation port 602 or the lower operation port 603, but the specific operation port passage signal corresponding to the passage has not been output. Note that the “specific operating port passage signal” is an ON signal (for a maximum of 30 seconds in the present embodiment) output for a single passage through the upper operating port 602 or the lower operating port 603 (FIG. 25).

  After being cleared to 0 when the power is turned on, the specific operation port passage counter 203d is reset each time a ball enters the upper operation port 602 or the lower operation port 603 (that is, the upper operation port switch or the lower operation port switch (various switches). Each time the ON of a part of 208 is detected, 1 is added, and each time one specific working port passage signal is output, 1 is subtracted in external information processing (see FIG. 24) described later.

  Therefore, if the value of the specific operating port passage counter 203d is 0, the number of specific operating port passing signals corresponding to the number of times the ball has passed to the upper operating port 602 or the lower operating port 603 has already been transmitted to the hall computer 262. To indicate that On the other hand, when the specific operating port passage counter 203d indicates a value of 1 or more, the passage of the ball to the upper operating port 602 or the lower operating port 603 by the number indicated by the specific operating port passing counter 203d is detected. Regardless, it indicates that there is a specific operating port passage signal that has not been output (not transmitted, waiting) to the hall computer 262.

  The upper first winning opening opening flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the electric accessory 661a provided at the entrance of the upper first winning opening 661 is opening, and the electric accessory 661a is opening. Indicates ON in some cases. Similarly, the upper second to upper fifth winning opening flag flags 203f to 203i are flags indicating whether or not the motorized bonuses 662a to 665a are being opened, respectively, and indicate ON when being opened. .

  The lower first winning opening opening flag 203j is a flag indicating whether or not the electric accessory 691a provided at the entrance of the lower first winning opening 691 is opening, and the electric accessory 691a is opening. Indicates ON in some cases. Similarly, the lower second to lower fifth winning opening opening flags 203k to 203n are flags indicating whether or not the motorized characters 692a to 695a are being opened, respectively, and indicate that they are on when being opened. .

  The input / output port 205 of the main control device 110 includes a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and an upper and lower first drive for opening and closing the electric accessory 661a. Upper and lower winning opening solenoids 210b for opening and closing the winning combination solenoid 210a and electric accessory 662a and upper and lower third winning opening solenoids 210c for opening and closing the electric combination 663a for driving the opening and closing of the electric accessory 664a. The upper fourth winning opening solenoid 210d, the upper fifth winning opening solenoid 210e for opening and closing the electric accessory 665a, the lower first winning opening solenoid 210f for opening and closing the electric accessory 691a, and the electric accessory 692a. The lower second winning opening solenoid 210g for opening and closing drive and the lower second opening and closing drive for the electric accessory 693a. The winning opening solenoid 210h, the lower fourth winning opening solenoid 210i for opening and closing the electric accessory 694a, the lower fifth winning opening solenoid 210j for opening and closing the electric accessory 695a, and the external output terminal plate 261 are connected. I have.

  Next, control processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. The processing executed by the MPU 201 of the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment also includes a start-up process started upon power-on, and a post-start-up process after the start-up process, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. The main processing is broadly divided into a main processing to be executed, a timer interrupt processing started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 ms), and an NMI interrupt processing.

  Here, the start-up process and the NMI process executed by the pachinko machine main controller 110 of the second embodiment are the start-up process (see FIG. 7) and the NMI process executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. This is the same processing as (not shown). The main processing executed by the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine of the second embodiment is the same as that of S202 to S206, S209, and S210 in the main processing (see FIG. 8) executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. The processing is omitted. That is, in the main processing executed by the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine of the second embodiment, the processing of S207 is executed after the execution of the external output processing (S201).

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process according to the second embodiment. The timer processing of the second embodiment is also executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 at predetermined intervals (every 2 ms in the present embodiment), similarly to the timer interrupt processing of the first embodiment (see FIG. 11). Is done.

  In the timer interrupt processing of the second embodiment, first, a switch read processing is executed (S501). In this switch reading process (S501), various switches 208 (for example, upper-stage operation port switch, upper first to fifth operation-port switches, upper first to fifth winning port switches, lower-stage operation port switch, lower first to fifth operation port switches) 5 operating port switch, lower first to fifth winning port switch, etc.) are read, and the state of the switch is determined to obtain detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, a switch monitoring process for performing various settings according to the winning detection information acquired by the switch reading process (S501) is executed (S511), and various signals such as a specific operating port passing signal to be output to the hall computer 262 are set. The external information processing for performing the setting of each setting data bit of the external output buffer 203a is executed (S512), the emission control processing is executed (S506), and the timer interrupt processing ends.

  Here, the switch monitoring process (S511) described above will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 19 and 20 are flowcharts showing the switch monitoring process (S511) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18) of the second embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 19, in the switch monitoring process (S511) of the second embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not a ball has passed an upper-stage operation port switch (a part of various switches 208) provided in the upper-stage operation port 602. It is confirmed (S2501), and if it has passed (S2501: Yes), the upper-stage working port switch process described later is executed (S2502).

  After execution of the upper operation port switch processing (S2502) or as a result of the confirmation in the processing of S2501, if a ball has not passed through the upper operation port switch (S2501: No), the upper first operation port 651 is provided. It is checked whether the ball has passed the first operation port switch (part of the various switches 208) that has been set (S2503). As a result of the check in S2503, if the ball has passed the upper first operation port switch (S2503: Yes), the upper first operation port switch processing described later is executed (S2504).

  After the execution of the upper first operation port switch (S2504) or as a result of the confirmation in the processing of S2503, if the ball has not passed through the upper first operation port switch (S2503: No), the upper second operation It is checked whether the ball has passed the upper second operation port switch (part of the various switches 208) provided in the port 652 (S2505). As a result of the confirmation in S2505, if the ball has passed the upper second operation port switch (S2505: Yes), the upper second operation port switch processing described later is executed (S2506).

  After the execution of the upper second operating port switch processing (S2506) or as a result of the confirmation in the processing of S2505, if a ball has not passed through the upper second operating port switch (S2505: No), the upper third operating port switch is executed. It is checked whether the ball has passed the upper third operating port switch (part of the various switches 208) provided in the port 653 (S2507). As a result of the check in S2507, if the ball has passed the upper third operating port switch (S2507: Yes), an upper third operating port switch process described later is executed (S2508).

  After the execution of the upper third operating port switch process (S2508) or as a result of checking by the processing of S2507, if the ball has not passed through the upper third operating port switch (S2507: No), the upper fourth operating port switch is executed. It is confirmed whether the ball has passed the upper fourth operation port switch (a part of various switches 208) provided in the port 654 (S2509). As a result of the confirmation in the processing of S2509, if the ball has passed the upper fourth operating port switch (S2509: Yes), the upper fourth operating port switch processing described later is executed (S2510).

  After the execution of the upper fourth operation port switch process (S2510) or as a result of the confirmation in the processing of S2509, if the ball has not passed through the upper fourth operation port switch (S2509: No), the upper fifth operation It is checked whether the ball has passed the upper fifth operation port switch (a part of various switches 208) provided in the port 655 (S2511). As a result of the confirmation in the processing of S2511, if the ball has passed through the upper fifth working port switch (S2511: Yes), the upper fifth working port switch processing described later is executed (S2512).

  After the execution of the upper fifth working port switch process (S2512) or as a result of the confirmation in the processing of S2511, if the ball has not passed through the upper fifth working port switch (S2511: No), the upper first prize. It is checked whether the ball has passed the upper first winning port switch (a part of various switches 208) provided in the port 661 (S2513). As a result of the confirmation in S2513, if the ball has passed the upper first winning opening switch (S2513: Yes), the upper first winning opening switch process described later is executed (S2514).

  After execution of the upper first winning opening switch process (S2514), or as a result of the processing of S2513, if the ball has not passed through the upper first winning opening switch (S2513: No), the upper second winning opening switch. It is checked whether the ball has passed the upper second winning opening switch (a part of various switches 208) provided in the mouth 662 (S2515). If the ball has passed through the upper second winning opening switch as a result of the confirmation in S2515 (S2515: Yes), the upper second winning opening switch process described later is executed (S2516).

  After the execution of the upper second winning opening switch process (S2516) or as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2515, if the ball does not pass through the upper second winning opening switch (S2515: No), the upper third winning opening. It is checked whether the ball has passed the upper third winning port switch (part of various switches 208) provided in the port 663 (S2517). If the ball has passed through the upper third winning opening switch as a result of the confirmation in S2517 (S2517: Yes), the upper third winning opening switch process described later is executed (S2518).

  After the execution of the upper third winning opening switch process (S2518) or as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2517, if the ball has not passed through the upper third winning opening switch (S2517: No), the upper fourth winning opening. It is checked whether the ball has passed the upper fourth winning opening switch (a part of various switches 208) provided in the mouth 664 (S2519). If the ball has passed through the upper fourth winning opening switch as a result of the check in S2519 (S2519: Yes), the upper fourth winning opening switch process described later is executed (S2520).

  After execution of the upper fourth winning opening switch process (S2520) or as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2519, if the ball has not passed through the upper fourth winning opening switch (S2519: No), the upper fifth winning opening It is checked whether the ball has passed the upper fifth winning port switch (a part of various switches 208) provided in the port 665 (S2521). If the ball has passed through the upper fifth winning opening switch as a result of the check in S2521, the upper fifth winning opening switch process described later is executed (S2522).

  After execution of the upper fifth winning opening switch process (S2522), or as a result of checking by the process of S2521, if the ball has not passed through the upper fifth winning opening switch (S2521: No), the process of S2523 ( (See FIG. 20).

  As shown in FIG. 20, in S2523, it is checked whether or not the ball has passed the lower operation port switch (part of the various switches 208) provided in the lower operation port 603 (S2523). As a result of the confirmation in the processing of S2523, if the ball has passed the lower operation port switch (S2523: Yes), the lower operation port switch processing described later is executed (S2524).

  After the lower operation port switch processing (S2524) is performed or as a result of the confirmation in the processing of S2523, if the ball has not passed through the lower operation port switch (S2523: No), the lower first operation port 681 is provided. It is checked whether the ball has passed the lower first operation port switch (part of the various switches 208) (S2525). If the ball has passed through the lower first operation port switch as a result of the confirmation in the processing of S2525 (S2525: Yes), the lower first operation port switch processing described later is executed (S2526).

  After the execution of the lower first operation port switch process (S2526) or as a result of the confirmation in the processing of S2525, if the ball has not passed through the lower first operation port switch (S2525: No), the lower second operation is performed. It is checked whether the ball has passed the lower second operating port switch (part of the various switches 208) provided in the port 682 (S2527). As a result of the confirmation in S2527, if the ball has passed through the lower second operation port switch (S2527: Yes), the lower second operation port switch processing described later is executed (S2528).

  After the execution of the lower second operating port switch process (S2528) or as a result of the confirmation in the processing of S2527, if the ball has not passed through the lower second operating port switch (S2527: No), the lower third operating port switch is executed. It is checked whether the ball has passed the lower third operating port switch (part of the various switches 208) provided at the port 683 (S2529). As a result of the confirmation in the processing of S2529, if the ball has passed the lower third operating port switch (S2529: Yes), the lower third operating port switch processing described later is executed (S2530).

  After the execution of the lower third operating port switch process (S2530) or as a result of the confirmation in the processing of S2529, if the ball has not passed through the lower third operating port switch (S2529: No), the lower fourth operating port switch is activated. It is checked whether the ball has passed the lower fourth operation port switch (a part of various switches 208) provided in the port 684 (S2531). As a result of the confirmation in S2531, if the ball has passed the lower fourth operating port switch (S2531: Yes), the lower fourth operating port switch processing described later is executed (S2532).

  After execution of the lower fourth operating port switch process (S2532) or as a result of the confirmation in the processing of S2531, if the ball has not passed through the lower fourth operating port switch (S2531: No), the lower fifth operating port switch is activated. It is checked whether the ball has passed the lower fifth working port switch (a part of various switches 208) provided in the port 685 (S2533). As a result of the check in S2533, if the ball has passed the lower fifth working port switch (S2533: Yes), the lower fifth working port switch processing described later is executed (S2534).

  After the execution of the lower fifth operating port switch process (S2534) or as a result of the confirmation in the processing of S2533, if the ball has not passed through the lower fifth operating port switch (S2533: No), the lower first prize is won. It is checked whether the ball has passed the lower first winning port switch (part of the various switches 208) provided in the port 691 (S2535). If the ball has passed through the lower first winning opening switch as a result of the confirmation in S2535 (S2535: Yes), the lower first winning opening switch process described later is executed (S2536).

  After execution of the lower first winning opening switch process (S2536) or as a result of checking by the processing of S2535, if the ball has not passed through the lower first winning opening switch (S2535: No), the lower second winning opening switch. It is checked whether the ball has passed the lower second winning opening switch (a part of the various switches 208) provided in the mouth 692 (S2537). As a result of the check in S2537, if the ball has passed the lower second winning opening switch (S2537: Yes), a lower second winning opening switch process described later is executed (S2538).

  After execution of the lower second winning opening switch process (S2538) or as a result of checking by the process of S2537, if the ball has not passed through the lower second winning opening switch (S2537: No), the lower third winning opening is determined. It is checked whether the ball has passed the lower third winning port switch (part of the various switches 208) provided in the port 693 (S2539). If the ball has passed through the lower third winning opening switch as a result of the check in S2539 (S2539: Yes), the lower third winning opening switch process described later is executed (S2540).

  After execution of the lower third winning opening switch process (S2540) or as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2539, if the ball has not passed through the lower third winning opening switch (S2539: No), the lower fourth winning opening is determined. It is checked whether the ball has passed the lower fourth winning opening switch (part of the various switches 208) provided in the mouth 694 (S2541). If the ball has passed through the lower fourth winning opening switch as a result of the confirmation in S2541 (S2541: Yes), the lower fourth winning opening switch process described later is executed (S2542).

  After execution of the lower fourth winning opening switch process (S2542) or as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2541, if the ball has not passed through the lower fourth winning opening switch (S2541: No), the lower fifth winning opening is determined. It is checked whether the ball has passed the lower fifth winning opening switch (part of the various switches 208) provided in the mouth 695 (S2543). If the ball has passed through the lower fifth winning opening switch as a result of the check in S2543 (S2543: Yes), the lower fifth winning opening switch process described later is executed (S2544).

  After the execution of the lower fifth winning opening switch process (S2544) or as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2543, if the ball has not passed through the lower fifth winning opening switch (S2543: No), the general winning opening 601 is set. Then, a process (other switch process) corresponding to the detection of the sphere by another switch such as a switch (not shown) for detecting the passage of the sphere to the device is executed (S2545), and the switch monitoring process (S511) is ended.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 21A, the above-described upper-stage operation port switch processing (S2502) will be described. FIG. 21A is a flowchart showing the upper-stage operation port switch processing (S2502) executed in the switch monitoring processing (FIGS. 19 and 20).

  As shown in FIG. 21A, in the upper stage opening switch process (S2502), first, 1 is added to a prize ball counter (not shown) (S2601). The prize ball counter is a counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203, and counts the number of prizes (number of prizes) to obtain a prize ball. The prize ball counter is configured to be cleared to 0 when the power is turned on and when a prize ball command to be output to the payout control device 111 is set.

  After the processing of S2601, 1 is added to the specific operating port passage counter 203d (S2602), the upper first to fifth fifth winning port solenoids 210a to 210e are turned on (S2603), and the upper first to fifth fifth winning ports are being opened. The flags 203e to 203i are turned on (S2604), and the upper-stage operation port switch process (S2502) ends.

  Therefore, when a ball wins in the upper operating port 602, the process of S2603 is executed, and as a result, the motorized actors 661a to 665a respectively attached to the upper first to upper fifth winning ports 661 to 665 are simultaneously transmitted. Open to the public.

  Further, the lower-stage operation port switch process (S2524) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21B is a flowchart showing the lower-stage operation port switch processing (S2524) executed in the switch monitoring processing (FIGS. 19 and 20).

  As shown in FIG. 21 (b), in the lower-stage operation port switch process (S2524), first, 1 is added to a prize ball counter (not shown) (S2611), and 1 is added to the specific operation port passage counter 203d. (S2612).

  After the processing of S2612, the lower first to lower fifth winning opening solenoids 210f to 210j are turned on (S2613), and the lower first to lower fifth winning opening opening flags 203j to 203n are turned on (S2614). The mouth switch processing (S2524) ends.

  Therefore, when a ball wins in the lower operating port 603, the process of S2613 is executed, and as a result, the motorized objects 691a to 695a associated with the lower first to lower fifth winning ports 691 to 695 are simultaneously transmitted. Open to the public.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 22A, the above-described upper first operation port switch process (S2504) will be described. FIG. 22A is a flowchart showing the upper first working port switch process (S2504) executed in the switch monitoring process (FIGS. 19 and 20).

  As shown in FIG. 22A, in the upper first operating port switch process (S2504), first, one is added to a prize ball counter (not shown) (S2621), and the upper first winning port opening flag is set. It is checked whether the switch 203e is off (S2622).

  If the upper first winning opening opening flag 203e is turned off as a result of the confirmation in the processing of S2622 (S2622: Yes), the electric accessory 661a attached to the upper first winning opening 661 is in the closed position, and therefore the open position. The upper first winning port solenoid 210a is turned on (S2623), the upper first winning port opening flag 203e is turned on (S2624), and the upper first operating port switch process (S2504) is ended.

  On the other hand, if the upper first winning opening opening flag 203e is turned on as a result of the confirmation in the processing of S2622 (S2622: No), the electric accessory 661a attached to the upper first winning opening 661 is already at the opening position. Therefore, the first operation port switch processing (S2504) is terminated without performing the processing of S2623 and S2624.

  Therefore, when a ball wins in the upper first operating port 651, the processing of S2623 is executed, and as a result, only the electric accessory 661a attached to the upper first operating port 661 is opened.

  The upper second operating port switch process (S2506), the upper third operating port switch process (S2508), the upper fourth operating port switch process (S2510), and the upper fifth operating port switch process (S2512) are also described above. The same processing as the upper first operation port switch processing (S2504) is performed. That is, in the upper first operating port switch process (S2504), the “upper first winning opening solenoid 210a” is replaced with a winning opening solenoid (upper second to upper fifth winning opening) corresponding to the operating port switch that detected the passage of the ball. Solenoids 210b to 210e) are read, and the “upper first winning port opening flag 203e” is changed to a winning port opening flag (upper second to upper fifth winning port opening) corresponding to the operating port switch that detected the passage of the ball. Flags 203f to 203i) may be read.

  Therefore, when a ball wins in the upper second operating port 652, only the electric accessory 662a attached to the upper second operating port 662 is opened as a result of the upper second operating port switch process (S2506). Similarly, when a ball wins in the upper third operating port 653, only the electric accessory 663a attached to the upper third winning port 663 is opened as a result of the upper third operating port switch process (S2508). . When a ball wins in the upper fourth operating port 654, only the electric accessory 664a attached to the upper fourth operating port 664 is opened as a result of the upper fourth operating port switch process (S2510). When the ball wins in the fifth operating port 655, only the electric accessory 665a attached to the upper fifth operating port 665 is opened as a result of the upper fifth operating port switch process (S2512).

  The lower first operation port switch process (S2526) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22B is a flowchart showing the lower first operating port switch process (S2526) executed in the switch monitoring process (FIGS. 19 and 20).

  As shown in FIG. 22B, in this lower first operating port switch process (S2526), first, 1 is added to a prize ball counter (not shown) (S2631), and the lower first winning port opening flag is opened. It is checked whether 203j is off (S2632).

  If the lower first winning opening opening flag 203j is turned off as a result of the confirmation in the processing of S2632 (S2632: Yes), the electric accessory 691a attached to the lower first winning opening 691 is in the closed position. Then, the lower first winning port solenoid 210f is turned on (S2633), the lower first winning port opening flag 203j is turned on (S2634), and the lower first operating port switch process (S2526) is ended.

  On the other hand, if the lower first winning opening opening flag 203j is on (S2632: No) as a result of the confirmation in the processing of S2632, the electric accessory 691a attached to the lower first winning opening 691 is already at the opening position. Therefore, without performing the processing of S2633 and S2634, the lower first operation port switch processing (S2526) is ended.

  Therefore, when a ball wins in the lower first operating port 681, the process of S2633 is executed, and as a result, only the electric accessory 691a attached to the lower first operating port 691 is opened.

  The lower second operating port switch process (S2528), the lower third operating port switch process (S2530), the lower fourth operating port switch process (S2532), and the lower fifth operating port switch process (S2534) are also described above. The same processing as the lower first operation port switch processing (S2526) is performed. That is, in the lower first operating port switch process (S2526), the “lower first winning port solenoid 210f” is replaced with a winning port solenoid (lower second to lower fifth winning port) corresponding to the operating port switch that has detected the passage of the ball. Solenoids 210g to 210j) are read, and the “lower first winning port opening flag 203j” is changed to a winning port opening flag (lower second to lower fifth winning port opening lower) corresponding to the operating port switch that detected the passage of the ball. Flags 203k to 203n).

  Therefore, when a ball wins in the lower second operating port 682, as a result of the lower second operating port switch process (S2528), only the electric accessory 692a attached to the lower second operating port 692 is opened. Similarly, when a ball wins in the lower third operating port 683, only the electric accessory 693a attached to the lower third operating port 693 is opened as a result of the lower third operating port switch process (S2530). . Further, when the ball wins the lower fourth operating port 684, only the electric accessory 694a attached to the lower fourth operating port 694 is opened as a result of the lower fourth operating port switch process (S2532), When the ball has won the fifth operating port 685, only the electric accessory 695a attached to the lower fifth operating port 695 is opened as a result of the lower fifth operating port switch process (S2534).

  Next, the upper first winning opening switch process (S2514) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23A is a flowchart showing the upper first winning opening switch process (S2514) executed in the switch monitoring process (FIGS. 19 and 20).

  As shown in FIG. 23A, in the upper first winning port switch process (S2514), first, 1 is added to a winning ball counter (not shown) (S2641), and the upper first winning port solenoid 210a is set. It is turned off (S2642). After the processing of S2642, the upper first winning opening opening flag 203e is turned off (S2642), and the upper first winning opening switch processing (S2514) ends.

  Therefore, when the ball has won the upper first winning opening 661, the process of S2642 is executed, and as a result, the electric accessory 661a of the opened upper first winning opening 661 is closed. .

  The upper second winning opening switch process (S2516), the upper third winning opening switch process (S2518), the upper fourth winning opening switch process (S2520), and the upper fifth winning opening switch process (S2522) are also described above. The same processing as the above first winning port switch processing (S2514) is performed. That is, in the upper first winning opening switch process (S2514), the "upper first winning opening solenoid 210a" is replaced with a winning opening solenoid (upper second to upper fifth winning opening) corresponding to the winning opening switch that detects the passage of the ball. Solenoids 210b to 210e) are read, and the “upper first winning port opening flag 203e” is changed to a winning port opening flag (upper second to upper fifth opening port opening) corresponding to the winning port switch that detects the passage of the ball. Flags 203f to 203i) may be read.

  Therefore, when a ball wins in the upper second winning opening 662, as a result of the upper second winning opening switch process (S2516), the electric accessory 662a of the opened upper second winning opening 662 is closed. . Similarly, when a ball wins in the upper third winning opening 663, as a result of the upper third winning opening switch processing (S2518), the electric accessory 663a of the opened upper third winning opening 663 is closed. You. In addition, when the ball has won the upper fourth winning opening 664, as a result of the upper fourth winning opening switch process (S2520), the electric accessory 664a of the opened upper fourth winning opening 664 is closed, When the ball wins in the upper fifth winning opening 665, as a result of the upper fifth winning opening switch processing (S2522), the opened electric accessory 665a of the upper fifth winning opening 665 is closed. Become.

  The lower first winning opening switch process (S2536) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23B is a flowchart showing the lower first winning opening switch process (S2536) executed in the switch monitoring process (FIGS. 19 and 20).

  As shown in FIG. 23B, in the lower first winning opening switch process (S2536), first, 1 is added to a winning ball counter (not shown) (S2651), and the lower first winning opening solenoid 210f is set. It is turned off (S2652). After the process of S2652, the lower first winning opening opening flag 203j is turned off (S2642), and the lower first winning opening switch process (S2536) ends.

  Therefore, when a ball wins in the lower first winning opening 691, the process of S2652 is executed, and as a result, the electric accessory 691a of the opened lower first winning opening 691 is closed. .

  The lower second winning opening switch process (S2538), the lower third winning opening switch process (S2540), the lower fourth winning opening switch process (S2542), and the lower fifth winning opening switch process (S2544) are also described above. The same processing as the lower first winning opening switch processing (S2536) is performed. That is, in the lower first winning opening switch process (S2536), the “lower first winning opening solenoid 210f” is replaced with a winning opening solenoid (lower second to lower fifth winning opening) corresponding to the winning opening switch that detects the passage of the ball. Solenoids 210g to 210j) are read, and the “lower first winning port opening flag 203j” is changed to a winning port opening flag (lower second to lower fifth winning port opening) corresponding to the winning port switch that detects the passage of the ball. Flags 203k to 203n).

  Therefore, when the ball wins in the lower second winning opening 692, as a result of the lower second winning opening switch process (S2538), the electric accessory 692a of the opened lower second winning opening 692 is closed. . Similarly, when a ball wins in the lower third winning opening 693, as a result of the lower third winning opening switch process (S2540), the electric accessory 693a of the opened lower third winning opening 693 is closed. You. Further, when the ball wins the lower fourth winning opening 694, as a result of the lower fourth winning opening switch process (S2542), the electric accessory 694a of the opened lower fourth winning opening 694 is closed, When the ball has won the lower fifth prize port 695, as a result of the lower fifth prize port switch process (S2544), the electric accessory 695a of the opened lower fifth prize port 695 is closed. Become.

  Next, the above-described external information processing (S512) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the external information processing (S512) executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 18) of the second embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 24, in the external information processing (S512) of the second embodiment, first, the external output buffer 203a is set to 0 as in the processing of S501 of the external information processing (see FIG. 13) of the first embodiment. A clearing process is executed (S1521).

  After the processing in S1521, it is checked whether the value of the specific operation port passage counter 203d is 0 (S1522). As a result of the check in S1522, if the value of the specific working port passage counter 203d is not 0, that is, if a value larger than 0 is confirmed (S1522: No), either the upper working port 602 or the lower working port 603 is used. Despite the detection of the passage of the ball to the hall computer 262, there is a specific operating port passage signal that has not been output (not transmitted, waiting) to the hall computer 262. In this case, the value of the signal output management counter 203c Is determined to be 0 (S1523).

  If the value of the signal output management counter 203c is 0 as a result of the check in S1523 (S1523: Yes), there is no specific operation port passage signal that is being managed (timed) by the signal output management counter 203c. Then, 15250 is set as an initial value in the signal output management counter 203c (S1529), and time counting (measurement) by the signal output management counter 203c is started.

  Here, the value of the signal output management counter 203c is decremented (counted down) by one every 2 ms, which is the execution interval of the external information processing (S512), so the initial value set in the signal output management counter 203c by the processing of S1529. The value corresponds to a period of 30.5 s (30500 ms).

  Note that, as a result of the process of S1529, the initial value corresponding to the period of 30.5 s set in the signal output management counter 203c is the first output period of the initial setting for one specific working-port entrance signal. This is a value corresponding to the total period of the period (30 s) and the second period (0.5 s) set in advance as the off period after the end of the output of the specific operation port passing signal.

  In the present embodiment, during the second period, which is the off period after the end of the output of the specific operating port passing signal, the player turns on and off the data display controlled by the hall computer 262 that has received the specific operating port passing signal. Is set to 0.5 s in order to make the off period visually distinguishable in units of the specific operation port passing signal adjacent in time series.

  In addition, the hall computer 262 of the present embodiment is configured to output a control signal so as to blink a data indicator set around the pachinko machine over a reception period of the specific operation port passage signal (ON signal). ing. That is, the output period of the specific operation port passage signal from the main control device 110 corresponds to the blinking period of the data display. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by setting the output period (first period) of the initial setting of the specific operating port passing signal to 30 s, the data for one winning of the ball to the upper operating port 602 or the lower operating port 603 is obtained. The indicator will blink for a maximum of 30s, the first period.

  After the processing of S1529, the value of the specific operation port passage counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S1530), and then the setting data bit corresponding to the specific operation port passage signal in the external output buffer 203a is set to 1 (S1531).

  With the setting data bit corresponding to the specific operation port passage signal in the external output buffer 203a set to 1 as a result of the processing of S1531, the external output processing (S201) in the main processing (see FIG. 8) of the next cycle is performed. When executed, a specific operation port passing signal, which is an ON signal, is output to the hall computer 262 via the external output terminal board 261.

  Therefore, when the value of the specific operation port passage counter 203d is not 0 and the value of the signal output management counter 203c is 0, it is the output timing of the specific operation port passage signal that has not been output or is on standby. A period of 30.5 s is set as an initial value to the signal output management counter 203c by the processing of S1529, and the output of the specific operating port passage signal is started.

  After the processing in S1531, the other setting processing (S1528) is executed, and the external information processing (S512) ends. In the other setting processing (S1528), setting data bits corresponding to signals other than the specific operation port passage signal in the external output buffer 203a (for example, a signal indicating that a special game state is being performed) are updated. After execution of the other setting processing (S1528), the external information processing (S512) ends, and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 18).

  On the other hand, if the value of the signal output management counter 203c is not 0 as a result of the confirmation in the processing of S1523, that is, if a value greater than 0 is confirmed (S1523: No), the signal is not output to the hole computer 262 (not transmitted, This indicates that the specific output port passage signal is being managed by the signal output management counter 203c in a state where the specific operation port passage signal (standby) is present. In such a case, first, the value of the signal output management counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S1524), and it is confirmed whether the value of the signal output management counter 203c is larger than 15000 (S1525).

  If the value of the signal output management counter 203c is larger than 15000 as a result of the check in S1525 (S1525: Yes), after the initial value is set in the signal output management counter 203c in S1529, that is, the specific operation port passing signal Since the output of (1) has been started, the period of 0.5 s has not yet elapsed, so in such a case, the flow shifts to the processing of S1531, and the output of the specific operating port passage signal is continued (S1531).

  On the other hand, if the value of the signal output management counter 203c is less than or equal to 15000 as a result of the confirmation in the processing of S1525 (S1525: No), a period of 0.5 s has elapsed since the output of the specific operating port passage signal was started. Then, it is checked whether the value of the signal output management counter 203c is smaller than 250 (S1526).

  If the value of the signal output management counter 203c is 250 or more as a result of the confirmation in the processing of S1526 (S1526: No), in such a case, if there is a specific operating port passing signal that has not been output to the hole computer 262, then 1 Indicates that the specific operation port passing signal is being output and at least 0.5 s has elapsed from the start of the output. In such a case, 250 is reset in the signal output management counter 203c (S1527), and the process proceeds to other setting processing (S1528).

  In this case (that is, when 250 is reset to the signal output management counter 203c by the processing of S1527), the processing of S1531 is not executed, and the output state of the setting data bit corresponding to the specific operation port passing signal is 0 ( Off). As a result, when the external output processing (S201) in the main processing (see FIG. 8) of the next cycle is executed, a signal in an OFF state is sent to the external output terminal board 261 instead of a specific operating port passing signal (ON signal). Output to the hall computer 262 via the

  Therefore, when there is a specific operating port passing signal that is being output and there is a specific operating port passing signal that has not been output, the output period of the specific operating port passing signal that is being output is set in advance as the third period. If it is equal to or more than 0.5 s, regardless of the initial value set in the signal output management counter 203c by the processing of S1529, after the signal output management counter 203c is reset to 250 by the processing of S1527, the specific operation is performed. The output of the mouth passing signal is interrupted.

  In the present embodiment, the third period visually distinguishes the blinking of the data display controlled by the hall computer 262 that has received the specific operating port passing signal by the unit of the specific operating port passing signal. The period is set to 0.5 s in order to obtain the period.

  On the other hand, if the value of the signal output management counter 203c is smaller than 250 as a result of the check in S1526 (S1526: Yes), the second period (0.5s) after the end of the output of the specific operation port passing signal. Therefore, the process proceeds to another setting process (S1528) while the output state of the setting data bit corresponding to the specific operation port passing signal is set to 0 (off).

  Here, as described above, when 250 is reset to the signal output management counter 203c by the processing of S1527, in the external information processing (S512) executed at the next timing (ie, after 2 ms), the signal output management is performed. Since the value of the counter 203c is 249, the process moves to the No side in the determination processing of S1526. In other words, after the signal output management counter 203c is reset to 250 by the processing of S1527 and the output of the specific operating port passing signal is interrupted, 0.5 s is set as the OFF period after the output of the specific operating port passing signal ends. It will be timed.

  If the value of the specific operating port passage counter 203d is 0 as a result of the confirmation in the processing of S1522 (S1522: Yes), it is confirmed whether the value of the signal output management counter 203c is 0 (S1532).

  When the value of the signal output management counter 203c is not 0 as a result of the confirmation in the processing of S1532, that is, when a value larger than 0 is confirmed (S1532: No), it is not output to the hole computer 262 (not transmitted, waiting) This shows that the specific output port passing signal is being managed by the signal output management counter 203c in the absence of the specific operating port passing signal in ()). In such a case, first, the value of the signal output management counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S1533), and it is checked whether the value of the signal output management counter 203c is smaller than 250 (S1534).

  As a result of the check in S1534, if the value of the signal output management counter 203c is equal to or greater than 250 (S1534: No), in such a case, if there is no specific operation port passing signal that has not been output to the hole computer 262, then 1 Indicates that the specific operating port passage signal is being output, the flow shifts to the process of S1531. As a result, the output of the specific operation port passage signal is continued.

  On the other hand, if the value of the signal output management counter 203c is smaller than 250 as a result of the confirmation in the processing of S1534 (S1531: Yes), the second period (0.5 s) after the end of the output of the specific operation port passing signal is completed. Since the time is being measured, the process proceeds to another setting process (S1528) while the output state of the setting data bit corresponding to the specific operation port passing signal is set to 0 (off).

  Therefore, when there is no specific operation port passing signal that has not been output to the hole computer 262, a first period (30s) that is an initial setting output period for one specific operation port entering ball passing signal, Management of both the second period (0.5 s), which is the off period after the end of the output of the specific operation port passing signal, is achieved by setting the initial value to the signal output management counter 203c once by the processing of S1529. You can do it.

  If the value of the signal output management counter 203c is 0 (S1532: Yes), there is no specific operation port passage signal to be output and no specific operation port passage signal to be period-managed. The process moves to S1508).

  As described above, according to the external information processing (S512) executed by the pachinko machine of the second embodiment, the specific operation port passage signal is output in the presence of the unoutput specific operation port passage signal. In this case, the output period of the specific operation port passage signal is secured as a third period at least for a preset period (0.5 s in the present embodiment), and the entire output period is set to the initial set value (this period). In the embodiment, it is adjusted to be shorter than 30 s). That is, the output period of the specific operation port passing signal is adjusted to a period that is equal to or longer than the third period that is set in advance and that is shorter than the initial setting value (first period) of the output period.

  It should be noted that, when the specific operation port passage signal is output in the presence of the unoutput specific operation port passage signal, there are the following cases. If an unoutput specific working port passing signal is generated during the output of the mouth passing signal, or (2) the specific operating port passing signal that is not output even if the output of the specific working port passing signal is newly started. Is assumed to remain.

  Here, in the case of the above (1), from the start of the output of the specific operating port passing signal to the generation of the non-output specific operating port passing signal, in the above-described external information processing (S512), ( The processing is executed in the order of S1522: Yes) → (S1532: No) → S1533 → (S1534: No) → S1531. However, when a non-output specific working port passage signal is generated, (S1522: No) → (S1532: No) → After the processing is executed in the order of S1524, the confirmation processing of S1525 is executed.

  At this time, if the specific operating port passage signal being output has already been output for the third period (0.5 s in the present embodiment), the branch processing of No in S1525 is executed, and as a result, The output of the specific operating port passage signal is ended without waiting for the elapse of the output period of the initial setting (the first period, 30 s in the present embodiment), and the OFF period (the second period, 0 in the present embodiment). .5s), the value of the signal output management counter 203c is reset by the processing of S1527.

  On the other hand, if the output period of the specific operating port passing signal being output has not yet reached the third period (0.5 s in the present embodiment), the Yes branching process in S1525 is executed, As a result, at least the third period is secured as the output period of the specific operation port passage signal.

  In the case of the above (2), after the output of the specific operating port passing signal is started, the output period of the specific operating port passing signal being output is the third period (0.5 s in the present embodiment). Is reached, the branching process of Yes in S1525 is executed. As a result, the output period of the specific operating port passage signal is set to only the third period (0.5 s in the present embodiment).

  Next, referring to FIG. 25, a specific operation port passing signal output from the pachinko machine of the second embodiment to hall computer 262 (the output state of the corresponding setting data bit in external output buffer 203a is 1) Will be described. FIG. 25 is a timing chart showing the output timing of the specific operation port passage signal in the pachinko machine of the second embodiment.

  FIG. 25A shows that the passage interval of the sphere to the upper operating port 602 or the lower operating port 603 is set as an initial value in the signal output management counter 203c by the processing of S1529 in the above-described external information processing (see FIG. 24). 6 is a timing chart exemplifying a case where the period is equal to or longer than a period (30.5 s).

  As shown in FIG. 25A, a detection signal sg11 (ON signal) indicating that a ball has passed through the upper operation port 602 is output from the upper operation port switch (part of the various switches 208), that is, the upper When the passage of the ball to the operation port 602 is detected by the upper operation port switch, the corresponding setting data bit in the external output buffer 203a is inverted from 0 to 1, and the detection signal sg11 of 1 (ie, one winning) The output of the one specific operation port passage signal ON11 for is started.

  When the output of the specific operation port passage signal ON11 is started, the process of S1529 in the external information processing (see FIG. 24) is executed, and an initial value is set in the signal output management counter 203c. The initial value set at this time is set in advance as a first period (30 s) which is an output period of an initial setting for one specific operation port entering ball passing signal and an OFF period after the output of the specific operation port passing signal. It is a value corresponding to the total period of the second period (0.5 s).

  During the time measurement of the period by the signal output management counter 203c, the passage of the ball to the upper working port 602 or the lower working port 603 is not detected, and the specific passing port is determined by the determination processing of S1534 in the external information processing (see FIG. 24). When it is determined that the output period of the pass signal has elapsed for the initial setting period (30 s in the present embodiment), the corresponding setting data bit in the external output buffer 203a is returned from 1 to 0, thereby passing through the specific operation port. The output of the signal ON11 ends.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, a value corresponding to 30.5 s, which is a total period of the output period (30 s) of the initial setting for the specific operating port passing signal ON11 and the OFF period OF11, is obtained by the processing of S1529. Since the signal output management counter 203c is set as the initial value, the value of the signal output management counter 203c does not reach 0 even when the signal output management counter 203c measures the output period of 30 s. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the signal output management counter 203c does not set an initial value for measuring the OFF period OF11 even after the output of the specific operating port passage signal ON11 ends, The OFF period OF11 (0.5 s in the present embodiment) can be subsequently measured.

  Outside the period in which the detection signal sg12 (ON signal) indicating that the ball has passed through the lower operation port 602 is managed by the signal output management counter 203c with respect to the detection signal sg11, the lower operation port switch (a part of the various switches 208) ), The processing of S1529 in the external information processing (see FIG. 24) is executed as in the case where the detection signal sg11 is output, and 30.5 s is set as the initial value in the signal output management counter 203c. Is set. As a result, similarly to the period management for the detection signal sg11, even after the output of the specific operation port passing signal ON12 ends, the initial value for measuring the OFF period OF12 is not set in the signal output management counter 203c, The off period OF12 can be subsequently timed.

  FIG. 25B is a timing chart illustrating a case where a non-output specific operation port passage signal is generated during the output of the specific operation port passage signal in a state where the unoutput specific operation port passage signal does not remain. .

  As shown in FIG. 25B, when a detection signal sg21 (ON signal) indicating that a ball has passed through the upper operation port 602 is output from the upper operation port switch (a part of the various switches 208), an external output is performed. The corresponding setting data bit in the buffer 203a is inverted from 0 to 1, and the output of one specific operating port passage signal ON21 for one detection signal sg21 is started.

  On the other hand, before the output period of the specific operating port passage signal ON21 reaches the initial setting output period of 30 s, the detection signal sg22 (ON signal) indicating that the ball has passed through the lower operating port 603 is output from the lower operating port. When output from a switch (a part of various switches 208), the corresponding setting data bit in the external output buffer 203a is set according to the output timing of the detection signal sg22 even before the output period of the initial setting is reached. Is returned from 1 to 0, and the output of the specific working port passage signal ON21 is ended.

  That is, in such a case, the output period of the specific operation port passage signal ON21 is secured by the determination process of S1525 in the external information processing (see FIG. 24) to at least the output period (third period) of 0.5 s. , S1526, the period is adjusted (reduced) to a period of less than 30 s, which is the initial output period (first period).

  After the output of the specific operating port passage signal ON21, the output of the specific operating port passing signal ON22 with respect to the detection signal sg22 output during the output of the specific operating port passing signal ON21 is performed after the elapse of the OFF period OF22 of 0.5 s. (Ie, the corresponding setting data bit in the external output buffer 203a is inverted from 0 to 1).

  Here, before the output period of the specific operation port passage signal ON22 reaches 30s, which is the output period of the initial setting, the detection signal sg23 (ON signal) indicating that the ball has passed through the upper operation port 602 is output. When output from the switch (part of the various switches 208), the output period of the specific operating port passing signal ON22 is set to 0.5 seconds as in the adjustment of the output period of the specific operating port passing signal ON22 described above. It is adjusted to an output period of less than 30 s while securing.

  Then, after the output of the specific operating port passage signal ON22 is completed, and further after the OFF period OF22 of 0.5 s elapses, the output of the specific operating port passing signal ON23 with respect to the detection signal sg23 is started. At this time, if the passage of a new ball to the upper operation port 602 or the lower operation port 603 is not detected, the specific operation port passage signal ON23 is turned off after the elapse of the output period of 30 s.

  According to the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, during the output of the specific operation port passage signal in a situation where the unoutput specific operation port passage signal does not remain, if the non-output specific operation port passage signal is generated, the specific As in the case of the working-port passage signals ON21 and ON22, the output period is shortened from the initial set value of 30 s.

  Therefore, even if a non-output specific operation port passage signal is generated during the output of the specific operation port passage signal in a state where the unoutput specific operation port passage signal does not remain, the detection signal and the specific operation for the detection signal are performed. The time difference from the output timing of the mouth passing signal can be minimized.

  Further, as described above, although the time difference between the detection signal and the output timing of the specific operation port passing signal with respect to the detection signal is made as small as possible, the OFF period is set to 0 as the second period in advance. .5s is ensured, so that the player can visually blink the data display controlled by the hall computer 262 which has received the specific operating port passage signal in units of adjacent specific operating port passing signals in chronological order. Can be distinguished.

  FIG. 25C is a timing chart exemplifying a case in which the output of the specific operating port passing signal is newly started and an unoutputted specific operating port passing signal remains.

  As shown in FIG. 25C, when a detection signal sg31 (ON signal) indicating that a ball has passed through the upper operation port 602 is output from the upper operation port switch (a part of the various switches 208), an external output is performed. The corresponding setting data bit in the buffer 203a is inverted from 0 to 1, and the output of the 1 specific operation port passing signal ON31 for the 1 detection signal sg31 is started.

  Here, before the output period of the specific operating port passage signal ON31 reaches the initial setting output period of 30 s, the detection signal sg32 (ON signal) indicating that the ball has passed through the upper operating port 602 is activated again. When output from the mouth switch, the output period of the specific operating port passing signal ON31 is secured in the output period (third period) of at least 0.5 s according to the output timing of the detection signal sg32, and the initial setting period is maintained. The output period (first period) is adjusted (reduced) to a period of less than 30 s.

  The output of the specific operating port passing signal ON32 with respect to the detection signal sg32 is started after the lapse of the 0.5 second OFF period OF31 after the output of the specific operating port passing signal ON31 ends.

  At this time, the detection signal sg33 (ON signal) indicating that the ball passed through the lower operation port 603 was output from the lower operation port switch (a part of the various switches 208) during the OFF period OF31 of 0.5 s. In this case, even after the specific operation port passing signal ON32 for the detection signal sg32 is output, the standby state is maintained without outputting the specific operation port passing signal ON33 for the detection signal sg33.

  In such a situation, in the pachinko machine of the second embodiment, the specific operating port passage signal ON32 is output for 0.5 s by executing the Yes branch processing in S1525 of the external information processing (see FIG. 24) in such a situation. Thereafter, by executing the No branching process in S1526, the corresponding setting data bit in the external output buffer 203a is returned from 1 to 0, and the output of the specific operating port passage signal ON32 is ended.

  Then, the output of the specific operation port passage signal ON33 with respect to the detection signal sg33 is started after the lapse of the 0.5 second OFF period OF32 from the end of the output of the specific operation port passage signal ON32. If the passage of a new ball to the upper operating port 602 or the lower operating port 603 is not detected after the output of the specific operating port passing signal ON33, the specific operating port passing signal ON33 is turned off after the output period of 30 s. You.

  According to the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, even if the output of the specific operating port passing signal is newly started, if the unoutputted specific operating port passing signal remains, as in the specific operating port passing signal ON32, , The output period is reduced to 0.5 s, which is set in advance as the third period. Therefore, the waiting period of the specific operation port passage signal ON33 with respect to the detection signal sg33 can be minimized.

  Therefore, even if the output of the specific operating port passing signal is newly started, even if a non-output specific operating port passing signal still remains, the detection signal and the specific operating port passing signal corresponding to the detection signal may not be detected. The time difference from the output timing can be minimized.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the third period visually distinguishes the blinking of the data display controlled by the hall computer 262 that has received the specific operating port passing signal by the player in units of the specific operating port passing signal. Since the time is set to 0.5 s to allow the player to turn on, the data display controlled by the hall computer 262 that has received the specific operating port passing signal blinks visually in units of the specific operating port passing signal. Can be distinguished.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine of the second embodiment, when outputting the specific operating port passage signal, the signal output management counter 203c, which is one of the counters, outputs the initially set output period (first output period). Is set as an initial value of the sum of the second period, which is set in advance as an OFF period after the output of the specific operation port passing signal is completed. Therefore, even after the output of such a signal is terminated due to the elapse of the output period of the initial setting for the specific operation port passing signal, the off period continues without setting the initial value for measuring the subsequent off period. Can be timed.

  That is, according to the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, when there is no specific operation port passing signal that has not been output to the hole computer 262, the output period of the initial setting for one specific operation port entering ball passing signal is present. The management of both the certain first period and the second period which is the off period after the end of the output of the specific operation port passing signal is performed by only one signal output management counter 203c at the start timing of the second period. This can be achieved without having to set initial values. Therefore, the control load on MPU 201 of main controller 110 can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the second period, which is the off period after the end of the output of the specific operating port passing signal, is set by the player using the data display controlled by the hall computer 262 that has received the specific operating port passing signal. The blinking is set to be an off period that can be visually distinguished in units of the specific operation port passing signal that is adjacent in time series. What is necessary is just a period (for example, a period of 52 ms as in the first embodiment) in which the working port passage signal can be distinguished. By setting the second period managed by the signal output management counter 203c to a period in which the hall computer 262 can distinguish the specific operating port passing signals that are adjacent in time series, the hall computer 262 becomes adjacent in time series. The specific operating port passing signal can be reliably detected.

  Similarly, in the present embodiment, during the third period, the player visually blinks the data display controlled by the hall computer 262 that has received the specific operating port passing signal in units of the specific operating port passing signal. The third period is a period during which the hall computer 262 can distinguish the specific operating port passage signal (for example, a period of 52 ms as in the first embodiment). I just need. By setting the third period managed by the signal output management counter 203c to be a period in which the hall computer 262 can distinguish the adjacent specific operating port passing signals in time series, the hall computer 262 can determine one specific operating port. Each of the passing signals can be reliably detected.

  Further, in this embodiment, the hall computer 262 uses the specific operating port passing signal output from the external output terminal board 261 and uses the data display during the output period of the specific operating port passing signal (that is, during the ON period). Is blinked and the data display is turned off during the off period, so that a display substantially corresponding to the hit state of the pachinko machine can be performed. Therefore, the hall computer 262 can respond to a state (for example, a hit state) generated in the pachinko machine without providing a counter for measuring a period during which the data display is blinked or performing control for measuring the period. The number of occurrences of the state (for example, the number of winnings that generate the winning state) can be grasped while performing the display.

  As described above, the present invention has been described based on one embodiment. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred.

  For example, in each of the above embodiments, the initial state of the output state of the signal output from the main control device 110 is set to 0 (off), and the first entrance port passing signal and the specific operating port passing signal are inverted from the initial state. 1 (on) is maintained over the output period. However, if the initial state of the output state is 1, the initial state is inverted and maintained at 0 over the output period. The passage signal and the specific operation port passage signal may be used.

  In each of the above embodiments, when the first entrance port passing signal and the specific operating port passing signal are output, the initial value is set in the signal output management counter 203c, and the value of the signal output management counter 203c is subtracted. Although the first period and the second period are configured to measure (manage) by moving, the first period and the second period are both measured by a method of adding the signal output management counter 203c from 0. It may be configured to measure time. Specifically, with the start of the output of the first entrance port passage signal and the specific operation port passage signal, the signal output management counter 203c starts counting time from 0, and monitors whether or not the first period has been reached. Then, if it is determined that the first period has been reached, the signal may be turned off, and further, it may be configured to monitor whether or not the total period of the first period and the second period has been reached.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the first entrance port passing signal and the specific working port passing signal are exemplified as the signals to be managed, but the present invention can be applied to various signals. In addition, like a 1st entrance port passage signal and a specific operation port passage signal, a passage which creates (or has the possibility of) a state advantageous to a player as compared with a normal state upon passage of a ball is triggered. When applied to the signal output when the ball passes through, the number of times the ball has passed through the passage opening that creates (or has the possibility of) a state advantageous to the player as compared with the normal state is determined by the hall computer. 262 can be ascertained reliably, and such data can be used by a hall manager for purposes such as nail adjustment and fraud monitoring.

  Further, when the variable display is started in the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81, a signal is output from the external output terminal board 261 to the hall computer 262, and this signal is adopted as a signal to be managed. May be. When the signal indicating the start of the fluctuation display is adopted as a signal to be managed, for example, every time the fluctuation start process (see FIG. 10) is executed, the signal is changed in the same manner as the external information processing (see FIG. 13). What is necessary is just to comprise so that output processing may be performed. Alternatively, every time the fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 10) is executed, the value of the first entrance passage counter 203b is subtracted, and when the value of the first entrance passage counter 203b is subtracted, the external information It may be configured to execute the same signal output processing as the processing (see FIG. 13).

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the management device is provided from the main control device 110 to the outside of the pachinko machine (the pachinko machine 10), such as the first entrance port passing signal and the specific operating port passing signal. Although the case of outputting to the hall computer 262 has been illustrated, the present invention is also applicable to the output of signals from the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114 to the hall computer 262. Further, the present invention can be applied to the output of signals inside the pachinko machine, such as the output of signals from the main control device 110 to the payout control device 111.

  Further, in the second embodiment, the ten electric auditors 661a, 662a, 663a, 664a, 665a, 691a, 692a, 693a, 694a, 695a are driven by the corresponding winning solenoids 210a to 210j. However, instead of the electric accessory, an accessory that operates by a mechanical link mechanism may be provided.

  For example, when a ball wins in the upper operating port 602, the accessories arranged at the entrances of the upper first to fifth winning ports 661 to 665 are simultaneously opened by a mechanical link mechanism, and When a ball wins in the first to upper fifth operating ports 651 to 655, the ball is arranged at the entrance of the corresponding upper winning port (upper first to upper fifth winning port 661 to 665) by a mechanical link mechanism. In the case where the played role is released and the ball wins in the upper first to fifth fifth winning openings 661 to 665, the upper winning opening (upper first to upper fifth winning opening) won by the mechanical link mechanism. 661 to 665) may be configured so that the accessory provided at the entrance is closed.

  Similarly, when a ball wins in the lower actuation opening 603, the accessories arranged at the entrances of the lower first to upper fifth winning openings 691 to 695 are simultaneously opened by a mechanical link mechanism, When a ball wins in the lower first to upper fifth operating ports 681 to 685, the ball is distributed to the corresponding lower winning port (lower first to fifth lower winning port 691 to 695) by a mechanical link mechanism. In the case where the provided accessory is opened and a ball wins in the lower first to lower fifth winning openings 691 to 695, the lower winning opening (lower first to lower fifth winning) which has been won by a mechanical link mechanism. The accessory provided at the entrance of the ports 691 to 695) may be configured to be closed.

  In the first embodiment, all the balls that have entered (winned) into the first entrance 64 are counted by the first entrance passage counter 203b, but are stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 ( It may be configured to count only the spheres to be suspended. That is, only when the number N of active balls is less than 4 (the number N of active balls N = 0 to 4), the first entrance opening passage counter 203b responds to the entry (prize) to the first entrance 64. May be added by one. Specifically, in the start winning process (see FIG. 12), the process of S602 may be executed after the Yes branch process in S603, not after the Yes branch process in S601.

  The present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, the present invention may be applied to a so-called second-type pachinko gaming machine having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone. Furthermore, other than a pachinko machine, it may be implemented as another game machine such as an arepachi or a sparrow ball.

  The present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a jackpot has been hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times right item) can increase the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times). ). Further, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area after the big hit symbol is displayed. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is awarded in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as areaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, so-called game machines in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating an operation lever in a state where a symbol is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button. Things. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows: "a display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided by operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time is a specific one ". In this case, coins, medals, etc. are representative game media. As an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Not included. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer.

  Hereinafter, a gaming machine and a modified example of the present invention will be described. State detecting means for detecting the occurrence of a predetermined state during a game in which a game medium is passed through the game area and a game value is provided to a player according to satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and the state is detected by the state detecting means In response to one occurrence of a state, the state of signal 1 is generated by inverting the output state of the signal from the first state and maintaining it for a preset first period, and then inverting it again to return to the first state. And a signal output means for outputting a signal, wherein when the signal output means starts outputting the state generation signal, the elapsed time from when the output of the state generation signal is started is measured. A period measuring unit, a first arrival determining unit that can determine whether the elapsed period measured by the period measuring unit has reached the first period, and the elapse period by the first arrival determining unit. Then, after it is determined that the first period has been reached, the elapsed period measured by the period measuring unit is changed to a total period of the first period and a preset second period. A gaming machine 1 comprising: a second arrival determination means capable of determining whether the vehicle has arrived.

  According to the gaming machine 1, when the occurrence of a predetermined state during a game in which a game medium is passed through the game area and a game value is given to the player in accordance with establishment of the predetermined condition is detected by the state detection unit , One state generation signal is output by the signal output means for one detected state occurrence. Here, the 1 state generation signal is generated by inverting the output state of the signal from the first state, maintaining the output state for the first period set in advance, and then inverting again to return to the first state. .

  When the output of the state generation signal by the signal output means is started in such a manner (that is, the output state of the signal is inverted from the first state), the elapsed time from the start of the output of the state generation signal is The measurement is started by the period measuring means. When the measurement of the elapsed period by the period measurement unit is started, first, the first arrival determination unit determines whether the elapsed period has reached the first period, that is, the output state of the signal is inverted again and the first arrival determination unit determines the first period. It is determined whether it is time to return to the state.

  When the first arrival determination unit determines that the elapsed period measured by the period measurement unit has reached the first period, the elapsed period subsequently reaches the second period set in advance. Is determined. Here, the second period is a period in which the operation device (for example, a management device installed outside the gaming machine) to which the state generation signal is output can distinguish the state generation signals adjacent in time series. In this case, the state generation signals adjacent in time series can be surely distinguished by the output destination arithmetic device. As a result, the occurrence of the state detected momentarily by the state detecting means can be reliably detected by the output destination arithmetic device.

  Therefore, both the management of the output period of the state generation signal (that is, the first period) and the management of the predetermined period after the output of the state generation signal (that is, the second period) are measured in each period. This can be realized without performing the process of setting the period measuring means according to the start timing. Therefore, the control load associated with outputting the state generation signal to the arithmetic unit every time a state is generated can be reduced.

  The lapse from the start of the output of the state generation signal by the signal output unit to the first period extends from the start of the output of the state generation signal by the signal output unit to the total period of the first period and the second period. Since it is measured as a passing point between the two, there is no need to provide a plurality of time-measurable components such as a counter and a timer as period measuring means, and it is possible to suppress consumption of storage capacity in the storage device.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the state detecting means described in the gaming machine 1 corresponds to a first entrance switch, an upper-stage operation port switch, and an upper-stage operation port switch (all not shown). External information processing (S505, S512) and external output processing (S201) correspond to the signal output means described in the machine 1, and the signal output management counter 203c as the period measuring means described in the gaming machine 1 , And the processing of S1504 and S1533 to count down the signal output management counter 203c corresponds to the first arrival determination means described in the gaming machine 1 corresponds to the processing of S1506 and S1534 and described in the gaming machine 1 The processes of S1502 and S1532 correspond to the second arrival determination means.

  In the gaming machine 1, when the output of the state generation signal is started by the signal output unit, the period measurement unit sets a value corresponding to a sum period of the first period and the second period as an initial value. The period measuring means includes a period setting means for setting the elapsed time by a method of subtracting a value set by the period setting means after the output of the state generation signal by the signal output means is started. A gaming machine 2 for measuring.

  According to the gaming machine 2, when the output of the state generation signal is started by the signal output means (that is, the output state of the signal is inverted from the first state), the first period and the second period are switched. A value corresponding to the sum period is set in the period setting means as an initial value. Thereafter, after the output of the state generation signal by the signal output unit is started, the period elapsed from the start of the output of the state generation signal by a method of subtracting the value set by the period setting unit is measured by the period measurement unit. You.

  Therefore, since the value set as the initial value in the period measuring unit is a value corresponding to the total period of the first period and the second period, once the initial value is set in the period measuring unit, It is possible to measure both the progress up to the first period and the total period of the first period and the second period, and to control the output of the state generation signal to the arithmetic unit every time a state is generated. The load can be reduced.

  Further, the period measuring unit in which a value corresponding to the sum period of the first period and the second period is set as an initial value is used for a period from the start of output of the state generation signal by the signal output unit to the first period. Since both the progress and the progress up to the sum of the first period and the second period can be measured, there is no need to provide a plurality of time-measurable components such as counters and timers as the period measuring means, and the storage device Consumption of the storage capacity in the storage device.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the processing in S1505 and S1529 corresponds to the period setting unit described in the gaming machine 2.

  In the gaming machine 1 or 2, the second period is a period in which an arithmetic device to which the state generation signal is output can distinguish the state generation signals adjacent in time series. 3.

  According to the gaming machine 3, in the second period after the output of the state generation signal ends, the arithmetic device (for example, a management device installed outside the gaming machine), which is the output destination of the state generation signal, is chronologically determined. Since the period in which adjacent state occurrence signals can be distinguished is set as a period, adjacent state occurrence signals in time series can be reliably distinguished by the output destination arithmetic device. As a result, the occurrence of the state detected momentarily by the state detecting means can be reliably detected by the output destination arithmetic device.

  In any of the gaming machines 1 to 3, the second period is a shortest period in which the arithmetic device can distinguish the state generation signals adjacent in time series or a nearby period longer than the shortest period. A gaming machine 4 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine 4, since the second period is the shortest period or a period near the shortest period in which the processing device at the output destination can distinguish the state generation signals adjacent in chronological order, the generation of each state is performed. The difference between the timing and the output timing of the state generation signal can be reduced. Therefore, not only can the output destination arithmetic unit reliably distinguish adjacent state generation signals in time series, but also the period from the end of output of the state generation signal to the start of output of the next state generation signal is maximized or almost maximized. Data acquisition efficiency can be improved.

  A gaming machine 5 in any of the gaming machines 1 to 4, wherein the first period and the second period are substantially the same.

  According to the gaming machine 5, the first period and the second period are substantially the same, that is, the output period of the state generation signal, and after the end of the output of the state generation signal, the next state generation signal is output to the arithmetic unit of the output destination. Are substantially the same as the period required to be able to distinguish them, so that management of each period can be facilitated. Further, the difference between the generation timing of each state and the output timing of the state generation signal can be reduced, and the data acquisition efficiency can be improved.

  Here, by making the second period a period in which the arithmetic device which is the output destination of the state generation signal can distinguish the state generation signals adjacent in time series, the management of each period is easy and The state generation signals that are adjacent in series can be surely distinguished by the output destination arithmetic device. In particular, the difference between the occurrence timing of each state and the output timing of the state generation signal is reduced by setting the second period to be the shortest period in which a signal can be detected by the arithmetic device of the output destination or a period near the shortest period. Data acquisition efficiency can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines 1 to 5, after the output of the state generation signal by the signal output unit is started, before the first arrival determination unit determines that the elapsed period has reached the summation period, or When the occurrence of the state is newly detected by the state detection unit before the elapsed time reaches the summation period by the second arrival determination unit, the second arrival determination unit Waiting means for waiting for the output of the state generation signal by the signal output means for the occurrence of the newly detected state until it is determined that the elapsed period has reached the summation period. A gaming machine 6 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine 6, after the output of the state generation signal by the signal output unit is started, before the first arrival determination unit determines that the elapsed period has reached the summation period, or by the second arrival determination unit. If the occurrence of a state is newly detected by the state detection means before it is determined that the elapsed period has reached the summation period, the output of the state generation signal by the signal output means in response to the occurrence of the newly detected state. Are waited by the standby means until the second arrival determination means determines that the elapsed period has reached the summation period. Therefore, it is possible to make the output destination arithmetic device surely detect the state that is detected every moment.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the first entrance passage counter 203b corresponds to the standby unit described in the gaming machine 6.

  In any one of the gaming machines 1 to 6, the state of which occurrence is detected by the state detecting means creates a state advantageous to the player as compared to the normal state or the possibility of the possibility when the passing of the game medium. The gaming machine 7, wherein the game medium passes through a specific passage portion having the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine 7, a state advantageous to the player is created or has a possibility as compared with the normal state when the game medium passes (for example, a state advantageous to the player is created as a result of the lottery). The passing of the game medium to the specific passing portion is detected as occurrence of a state by the state detecting means. Therefore, the number of times the game medium has passed through the specific passage section that creates or has a possibility of being advantageous to the player as compared with the normal state can be grasped by the output destination management device, and such data can be managed by the hall management. Can be used for purposes such as nail adjustment and fraud monitoring.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the first entrance 64, the upper specific operating port 602, and the lower specific operating port 603 are illustrated as the specific passing sections described in the gaming machine 7.

  The gaming machine 8 according to any one of the gaming machines 1 to 7, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in response to operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided in an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is a case where the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable the ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

  The gaming machine 9 according to any one of the gaming machines 1 to 7, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is as follows. The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

  The gaming machine 10 according to any one of the gaming machines 1 to 7, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
203c signal output management counter (period measurement means)

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine and the like.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, centralized management by a hall computer has been implemented for gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slots installed in a game arcade (for example, Patent Documents 1 and 2). The form of such centralized, for example, a predetermined winning opening (e.g., by winning the game ball starting opening the opportunity for those or lottery occurs) or the starting opening winning signal for indicating that the game ball is won to, game and prize balls signal indicating that award based on a winning to the sphere of winning opening balls are paid out, etc. those have enough in the signal indicating the person or state, a signal corresponding to the various states that occur during the game (hereinafter, this the signals may be referred to as "state generator signal") output from the respective gaming machines to the hall computer, the hall computer side receiving these signals, for example, of those or per based on the received signal out counts and calculates and outgoing counts than in those have enough (base), and the like and output the result to the monitor and paper.

Here, the output of the state generation signal from each of the gaming machines to the hall computer is started, for example, by generating an ON signal whose output state is inverted when a predetermined state occurs, and thereafter, the hall computer outputs the state signal. After the output of the ON signal is continued for a first period (for example, 0.5 s) in which the ON signal can be detected, the output state is inverted again to end the process.

On the other hand, in order for the hall computer to distinguish the state occurrence signals adjacent in time series, it is necessary to continue the output state for the second period (for example, 0.5 s) after inverting the output state again. is there. Therefore, when the gaming machine outputs the state generation signal to the hall computer, the hall computer can distinguish between the first period which is the output period of the ON signal serving as the state generation signal and the state generation signal which is adjacent in time series to the hall computer. It is required to manage a second period which is a period.

JP-A-7-59935 JP 2005-334218 A

The present invention, in the illustrated game machine or the like, and its object is to provide a gaming machine which makes it possible to suitably perform the output of the signal to an external device such as a hall computer.

Gaming machine of claim 1, wherein in order to achieve the object, a state detecting means for detecting the occurrence of a predetermined state in the Yu technique, for the occurrence of one state detected by the state detecting means, signal after maintaining the first on-state period of the output being state is set in advance by reversed from the off state, and a signal output means for outputting one status signal skip back to the oFF state is reversed again Wherein when the on state is started by the signal output means, a period measuring means for measuring an elapsed time from the start of the on state, and the elapsed time measured by the period measuring means Is a first arrival determination means capable of determining whether the first period which is an ON period has been reached, and the first arrival determination means determines that the elapsed period has reached the first period. After pulling Subsequently, the elapsed time period measured by the period measuring means, the possible determine has reached the first summer period obtained by combining the second period is OFF period set in advance as a period and a second arrival determination unit, when the status signal of the non-output which has not been outputted from the signal output means is present in said first period of time, you shorten the first period.

Gaming machine of claim 2, in the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein, Ru with a substrate box.

According to the present invention, it is possible to suitably output a signal to an external device such as a hall computer.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in one embodiment. It is a front view of a game board. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. (A) is a figure which shows typically the area division setting of a display screen, and an effective line setting, and (b) is a figure which illustrates an actual display screen. It is a figure showing the outline of various counters. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a fluctuation process executed in the main process of FIG. 10 is a flowchart illustrating a change start process executed in the symbol change process of FIG. 9. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed in the timer interrupt process of FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing external information processing executed in the timer interrupt processing of FIG. It is a timing chart which shows the output timing of the 1st entrance passage signal. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process of 2nd Embodiment. 19 is a flowchart showing a switch monitoring process executed in the timer interrupt process of FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a switch monitoring process executed in the timer interrupt process of FIG. (A) is a flowchart showing an upper-stage operation port switch process, and (b) is a flowchart showing a lower-stage operation port switch process. (A) is a flowchart showing an upper first operating port switch process, and (b) is a flowchart showing a lower first operating port switch process. (A) is a flowchart showing an upper first winning opening switch process, and (b) is a flowchart showing a lower first winning opening switch process. 19 is a flowchart showing external information processing executed in the timer interrupt processing of FIG. It is a timing chart which shows the output timing of a specific operation port passage signal.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) for firing a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch for guiding a ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and is provided with a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16. On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape that projects forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the effect pattern of the variable display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or changing the effect content at the time of the reach effect.

  In addition, light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot.

  In addition, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and which can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs. Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right side illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing spheres that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface at the center thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. (Not shown) and a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by a change in electric resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount. A ball is fired at a strength corresponding to the changing resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and a number of nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62 for ball guidance, a general winning opening 63, The entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the periphery thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are provided with wood screws from the front side of the game board 13. And so on. In addition, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window 14 c of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear of the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 surround the front and rear of the game board 13. A game area to be played is formed. The game area is a substantially circular area formed on the front surface of the game board 13 and divided by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70.

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is provided between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

  A first symbol display device 37 provided with a plurality of LEDs 37a, which are light emitting means, and a seven-segment display 37b, is provided in the upper right portion of the game area as viewed from the front (the upper right portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display device 37 performs a display according to each control performed by the main control device 110, and mainly displays a game state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing probability, reducing the time, or in the normal state by a lighting state, indicating whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not, by the lighting state, and a symbol corresponding to a probability change in a stop symbol. The lighting state indicates whether the symbol is a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot or an off-design, or the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state. The seven-segment display device 37b displays the number of rounds during a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37a are configured to emit different colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs, and various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 can be indicated with a small number of LEDs by a combination of the emitted colors. .

  In addition, the above-mentioned pachinko machine 10 being in a probable change state is a game state in which the jackpot probability increases and the game easily shifts to the special game state. Further, during the probable change in the present embodiment, the hit state of the second symbol is increased, and the ball is likely to enter the first entrance 64 (see FIG. 3). In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a reduced working hours, it is a game state in which it is easy for the ball to enter the first entrance 64 (see FIG. 3), with only the winning probability of the second symbol being increased while the jackpot probability remains unchanged. . Also, the pachinko machine 10 being in the normal state is a game state in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is in progress (the state in which neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased). In addition, according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10, the opening time of the electrically-powered accessory (not shown) attached to the first entrance 64 and the number of times the electrically-driven accessory is opened per one time are changed. It is good.

  In the game area, a plurality of general prize holes 63 are provided in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 includes a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “LCD”) that displays the third symbol in a variable manner when a winning in the first entrance 64 is triggered. A second symbol display device 82 including a light-emitting diode (hereinafter abbreviated as “LED”) that variably displays the second symbol when the ball passes through the second entrance 67 is used as a trigger.

  The display contents of the third symbol display device 81 are controlled by a display control device 114 described later, and, for example, three symbol columns of left, middle, and right are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Further, in the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display having an 8-inch size, and the variable display device unit 80 includes a center frame 86 surrounding the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. Are arranged. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, while the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. Decorative display is performed according to the display. Note that, instead of the LCD, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Also, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 until the stop symbol (any one of the probable jackpot symbol, the ordinary jackpot symbol, and the off symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The number of times the ball is held is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of times the ball is held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the number of lighting of the holding lamp 85. The four holding lamps 85 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically above the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the winning in the first entrance 64 is configured to be held up to four times. However, the maximum number of holdings is not limited to four, and three or less, Alternatively, it may be set to five or more times (for example, eight times). In addition, the holding lamp 85 is deleted, and the number of times the variable display is held based on the winning in the first entrance 64 is held numerically in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is held. The display may be performed in a different mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern) by the number of times. Further, since the number of times of holding is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the holding lamp 85.

  The second symbol display device 82 has a display portion 83 of a second symbol and a holding lamp 84, and each time a ball passes through the second entrance 67, a display symbol (second symbol) is displayed on the display portion 83. The symbol “O” and the symbol “X” are alternately lit to perform a variable display, and when the variable display stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, the symbol “O”), the first symbol is displayed. The entrance 64 is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time. The number of times the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of times held is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37 and is also lit by the holding lamp 84. In addition, the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps on the display unit 83 as in the present embodiment, and also the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. May be performed using a part of. Similarly, the holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Also, as with the first entrance 64, the maximum number of times of passage through the second entrance 67 is not limited to four, but is three or less, or five or more (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of times of suspension is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the suspension lamp 84.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter is provided. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (a part of various switches 208) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. Due to this, a jackpot lottery is performed by the main controller 110, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. Further, the first entrance 64 is also one of the winning openings from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball enters.

  A variable winning device 65 is provided below the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery in the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so that the big hit is stopped and the LED 37a is turned on. The stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is performed.

  The variable prize winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening opening solenoid (solenoid 209 (see FIG. 4)). The specific winning port 65a is normally in a closed state where a ball cannot be won or hard to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening mouth solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are provided. It operates so that the state and the state are alternately repeated.

  Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-described embodiment. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the jackpot on the first symbol display device 37 is turned on, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening is provided. During the opening of the mouth 65a, a gaming state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins in the specific winning opening 65a is defined as a special gaming state. It may be formed.

  At the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, sticking spaces K1 and K2 for sticking stamps, identification labels and the like are provided. Through the small window 35.

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66 and a second ball entry port (through gate) 67. A ball that has not entered any of the winning ports 63, 64, and 65a is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out port 66. In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is peeled to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102 or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electric configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 has an external output buffer 203a, a first entrance passage counter 203b, and a signal output management counter 203c. Here, the external output buffer 203a is a buffer for storing setting data of a predetermined size (for example, 1 byte) to be output to the hall computer 262 via the external output terminal board 261.

  The external output buffer 203a is composed of a plurality of setting data bits, and each setting data bit is added to a state to be managed during the game (for example, to the first entrance 64 which is a winning opening which triggers a jackpot lottery). A value of 0 (off) or 1 (on) is set according to whether the ball has entered (passed), whether the game is a big hit, or the like.

  The setting of the value in the external output buffer 203a (that is, the setting of the value in each setting data bit) is updated at an interval of 2 ms, which is the execution interval of the external information processing (see FIG. 13). As described above, the setting data updated every 2 ms is output every time the external output processing is performed in the main processing (see FIG. 8) with 4 ms as one cycle (that is, at an interval of 4 ms). And transmitted to the hall computer 262.

  The first entrance passage counter 203b is a counter that counts a state in which a ball has passed through the first entrance opening 64 but the first entrance passage signal corresponding to the passage has not been output. Note that the “first entrance port passing signal” is an ON signal (see FIG. 14) output for a predetermined period (in the present embodiment, for 52 ms) for one pass to the first entrance port 64. ).

  After the first entrance opening counter 203b is cleared to 0 when the power is turned on, every time a ball enters the first entrance 64 (that is, the first entrance switch (a part of the various switches 208) 1) is added each time ()) is detected, and is subtracted by 1 in external information processing (see FIG. 13) described later each time one first entrance passage signal is output.

  Therefore, when the value of the first entrance passage counter 203b is 0, the number of first entrance passage signals corresponding to the number of times the ball has passed through the first entrance 64 is transmitted via the external output terminal plate 261. Is transmitted to the hall computer 262. On the other hand, when the first entrance passage counter 203b indicates a value of 1 or more, the passage of the ball to the first entrance 64 by the number indicated by the first entrance passage counter 203b is detected. Nevertheless, it indicates that there is a first entrance passage signal that has not been output (not transmitted, waiting) to the hall computer 262.

  The signal output management counter 203c includes an output period (first period) of the first entrance passage signal and a period after the end of the first entrance passage signal, and the hall computer 262 arrives next. This is a counter for measuring (measuring) both the off period (second period) in which the first entrance passage signal can be distinguished.

  Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in managing the output period of the first entrance passage signal to the hall computer 262, the first value set in the signal output management counter 203c is the first value. A value corresponding to the sum of the period (the output period of the first entrance passage signal) and the second period (the subsequent OFF period) is set, and the hall computer 262 is provided with such a characteristic. The control load of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 can be reduced with the output of the first entrance passage signal.

  The RAM 203 includes, in addition to the buffers and counters described above, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and values of various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which is stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 and data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (see FIG. 8), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 7). The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When the power is turned off, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 82, various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), a specific prize. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing forward and closing the opening and closing drive of the opening and closing plate of the opening 65a, a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and an external output terminal plate 261 are connected.

  The external output terminal plate 261 is configured to be connectable to the hall computer 262. The external output terminal board 261 receives data (setting data stored in the external output buffer 203 a) output from the main control device 110 and relays the data to the hall computer 262.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has an external output buffer (not shown). The external output buffer in the payout control device 111 has a predetermined size (for example, 1) to be output to the hall computer 262 via the external output terminal board 261 similarly to the external output buffer 203a provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing setting data of (byte), and includes a plurality of setting data bits (for example, setting data bits for a prize ball signal indicating whether or not a predetermined number of prize balls have been paid out).

  The RAM 213, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags, counters, and I / Os. A work area (work area) in which values such as O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed, and the information of the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, the external output terminal board 261 and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The external output terminal board 261 to which the hall computer 262 can be connected as described above stores data output from the payout control device 111 (setting data stored in an external output buffer (not shown)). And relays the data to the hall computer 262.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so as to have a launching strength of the ball according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when a command to launch the ball is issued by the main control device 110. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and corresponds to the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 on the condition that the firing stop switch for stopping the firing is not operated. Then, the firing solenoid is excited, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off lights in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34), and controls the display control device 114. The setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 to be performed is controlled. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225.

  The display control device 114 controls the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a ROM (program ROM) 232, a work RAM 233, a video RAM 234, a character ROM 235, an image controller 236, an input port 237, an output port 238, and bus lines 239 and 240. It has. The input side of the input port 237 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 237 is connected to the MPU 231, the ROM 232, the work RAM 233, and the image controller 236. A video RAM 234 and a character ROM 235 are connected to the image controller 236, and an output port 238 is connected via a bus line 240. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 238. Note that the pachinko machine 10 is a model having the same design as the design displayed on the third symbol display device 81, even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model having different jackpot lottery probabilities and different numbers of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot. Therefore, the display control device 114 is used as a common component to reduce cost.

  The MPU 231 of the display control device 114 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the symbol display command input from the audio lamp control device 113. The ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data. The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various programs.

  The character ROM 235 has a character information memory (not shown) in which character information such as a symbol (background symbol or decorative symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored. The character information stored in the character information memory (not shown) includes numerical data (for example, 0 to 9) of a third symbol that is variably displayed, and symbol data other than numeric data (for example, a symbol of a box or a helmet). A design (see FIG. 5B), a background design, a notice character design or a character design (for example, a boy (see FIG. 5B)).

  Each piece of character information stored in the character information memory 235a is stored as compressed data in order to reduce the amount of data to be stored. In this embodiment, the character information is composed of approximately 1024 Mbytes, and the approximately 1024 Mbytes of character information are compressed to approximately 768 Mbytes and stored in the character information memory. The character information stored in the character information memory as data in a compressed format is read and decompressed, and then written to a character information storage area (not shown) in the video RAM 234.

  The video RAM 234 has a display storage area (not shown) for storing effect data corresponding to display contents (effect patterns of variable display, effect contents at the time of reach effect, etc.) displayed on the third symbol display device 81. And a character information storage area (not shown) for storing character information read from the character information memory of the character ROM 235 and then decompressed.

  The display storage area (not shown) is an area for storing the effect data displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By rewriting the contents of the display memory area, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is performed. The contents are changed. The character information storage area stores character information (character data) serving as a material such as a background design or a decorative design. Data necessary for display on the third symbol display device 81 is stored from the character information storage area. The data is read and written to the display storage area in the video RAM 234.

  The reason for storing the character information in the character information storage area of the video RAM 234 is that the processing speed of the RAM is generally higher than that of the ROM, and the character information is directly displayed from the character ROM 235 on the display in the video RAM 234. If writing directly to the storage area, if the amount of data to be read is large, it takes time to read, and smooth display cannot be performed or clear display cannot be performed. Further, it is because processing of display data (for example, changing the size of a decorative pattern or changing the color of a background pattern) in the video RAM 234 is easy.

  The image controller 236 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 231, the video RAM 234, and the output port 238 to intervene in the reading and writing of data, and reads out the display data stored in the video RAM 234 at a predetermined timing to read out the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And a switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute the NMI interrupt process (not shown), store the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 and the RAM 213, and complete the process.

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 is pressed. The main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 clear each backup data when the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and cause the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data. A payout initialization command is transmitted to the payout control device 111.

  Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a diagram for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 5A is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 5B is a diagram exemplifying an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9" and one type of petal-shaped sub-type formed smaller than the main symbols. Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers from “0” to “9” on the rear symbol made of a wooden box, and the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are Large numbers are added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) are provided with an accessory design imitating a character such as a furoshiki, a helmet, etc., with a talisman covering almost the front of the wooden box, An even number is added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so as to be small in green and displayed in front of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed, and a big hit occurs after the variable display ends. It is configured as follows. When shifting to the high-probability state (probable change state) after the end of the jackpot, a fluctuation display is performed in which main symbols (corresponding to “high-probability symbols”) to which odd numbers are added are aligned. On the other hand, when the state shifts to the low-probability state after the end of the big hit, a fluctuation display is performed in which the main symbols (corresponding to “low-probability symbols”) to which even-numbered numbers are aligned are provided. Here, the high-probability state refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as added value after the jackpot ends, that is, a so-called probability change (probable change). The normal state (low-probability state) refers to a state in which the probability of success is not constant, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the probability of success is lower than that in the case of probability change.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into upper and lower parts, and the lower two-thirds are main display areas Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed. The upper third is a sub-display area Ds for displaying a notice effect and a character.

  In the main display area Dm, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 of left, middle, and right are displayed. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. For this reason, a total of 20 third symbols of 10 main symbols and 10 sub symbols are set in each symbol row, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is scrolled from top to bottom with periodicity. The variable display is performed. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, a third symbol is displayed in three stages of upper, middle, and lower for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 displays a total of nine third symbols in three rows and three columns. In the main display area Dm, five effective lines, that is, an upper line L1, a middle line L2, a lower line L3, a rising line L4, and a rising line L5 are set. Then, in each game, the variable display stops in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and at the time of the stop, the combination of the big hit symbols on any of the activated lines (in the present embodiment, the same Big hits) is displayed as a big hit.

  The sub display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is equally divided into three notice areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Here, the left and right notice areas Ds1 and Ds3 are usually covered with a double-sided opaque door that is electrically opened and closed by a solenoid (not shown). When opened, the display area becomes visible to the player. The center notice area Ds2 is a display area that is always visible without being covered by the door.

  As shown in FIG. 5B, on the actual display screen, a total of nine main symbols and three sub symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, the left and right doors are closed, and the left and right notice areas Ds1 and Ds3 are covered and hidden, so that the display screen cannot be viewed. If one or both of the left and right doors are opened during the change display, a moving image is displayed in the left and right notice areas Ds1 and Ds3, and the player is informed that the state is easier to transition to the big hit than usual. It is suggested. In the center notice area Ds2, normally, a predetermined character (a boy with a hachimaki in the present embodiment) performs a predetermined operation, sometimes performs a special operation different from the predetermined operation, or a different character is displayed. And an announcement performance is performed. Although the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is divided into upper and lower display areas Dm and Ds in principle, the third symbol and characters are displayed larger across the display areas Dm and Ds. A display effect can be performed.

  Next, a counter provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform a jackpot lottery, display setting of the first symbol display device 37, lottery of a display result of the second symbol display device 82, and the like.

  For setting the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37, a first random number counter C1 used for a jackpot lottery, a first hit type symbol counter C2 used for selecting a jackpot symbol, and a stop pattern selection counter C3, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the first random number counter C1, and fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 used for selecting a fluctuation pattern are used. In addition, a second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 82, and a second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated at an interval of 4 ms, which is an execution interval of the main process (see FIG. 8), or at an interval of 2 ms, which is an execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 11). The updated value is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The data is appropriately stored in the counter buffer. The RAM 203 is provided with a reserved ball storage area including one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas). Each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored in synchronization with the ball winning timing.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by one, for example, in the range of 0 to 738 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 738). In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1. Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 738), and each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 11) is executed. It is updated once and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 8). The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 is set at the timing when the ball has won the first entrance 64. Is stored in The number of random hit values at the time of low probability and the high probability are set at two types. The number of random numbers at the time of low probability is two, and the value is “373,727”. Yes, the number of random number values that will be a big hit at a high probability is 14, and the value is "59, 109, 163, 211, 263, 317, 367, 421, 479, 523, 631, 683, 733".

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 at the time of a big hit. In the present embodiment, the first hit type counter C2 is added one by one in a range of 0 to 4 to obtain a maximum value (that is, a maximum value). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching 4). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. Is stored in Note that the value of the random number that becomes the high probability state after the big hit is “1, 2, 3”, the value of the random number that becomes the low probability state after the big hit is “0, 4”, and two types of the hit types are determined. You. Therefore, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is a display mode corresponding to two types of jackpots, a high probability state and a low probability state, and a display mode corresponding to a loss. Any one of the three types of display modes is selected.

  The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one, for example, in the range of 0 to 238, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 238). In the present embodiment, the effect pattern displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop pattern selection counter C3, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol and stopped. "Reach out of front and rear" (for example, in the range of 0 to 8), and "reach other than front and rear out of reach" (for example, in the range of 9 to 38) in which the final stop symbol stops at locations other than the front and rear of the reach symbol after the same reach occurs. Three stop (effect) patterns of "completely out of range" (for example, in the range of 39 to 238) in which no reach occurs are selected. The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and is stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. Is stored.

  The stop pattern selection counter C3 is provided with a plurality of tables having different ranges of random numbers from which the stop pattern is selected. This depends on whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high-probability state or the low-probability state, in which area of the reserved ball storage area each random number value is stored (that is, the number of reserved), and the like. This is for changing the selection ratio of the stop pattern.

  For example, in the high-probability state, a table in which the range of the random value corresponding to the stop pattern of “completely out” is as large as 10 to 238 is selected so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because the jackpot is likely to occur, It becomes easy to select "completely out of order". In this table, the “reach out of front and rear” is narrowed to 0 to 5 and the “reach other than front and rear out” is also narrowed to 6 to 9, making it difficult to select “reach out of front and rear” or “reach other than front and rear out”. Further, if the random numbers are not stored in the reserved ball storage area in the low probability state, in order to secure the ball entry time to the first entry port 64, the disturbance corresponding to the "completely out" stop pattern is required. A table whose numerical value range is as narrow as 51 to 238 is selected, and it is difficult to select “completely out of range”. In this table, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop pattern of “reach other than front and rear out” is widened to 9 to 50, and “reach other than front and back out” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, the ball entry time of the ball into the first entrance 64 can be ensured, so that the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is easily performed continuously.

  Of the two variation type counters CS1 and CS2, one variation type counter CS1 is configured to be added one by one in the range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The other variation type counter CS2 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 240, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 240). In the following description, CS1 is also referred to as “first variation type counter”, and CS2 is also referred to as “second variation type counter”.

  A rough display mode such as so-called normal reach, super reach, premium reach, and the like is determined by the first variation type counter CS1. The determination of the display mode is, specifically, the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Further, the fluctuation time (in other words, the number of fluctuation symbols) until the final stop symbol (the middle symbol in this embodiment) stops after the occurrence of the reach is determined by the second fluctuation type counter CS2. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, the display control device 114 determines the reach type and the fine symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third display device 81. Therefore, by combining these variation type counters CS1 and CS2, a variety of variation patterns can be easily realized. It is also possible to determine the symbol variation mode only by the first variation type counter CS1, or to determine the symbol variation mode by a combination of the first variation type counter CS1 and the stop symbol. The values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 8) described later is executed once, and are repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process.

  The value of the variation type counter CS3 is, for example, added one by one in the range of 0 to 162, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 162). In the following description, CS3 is also referred to as “third variation type counter”. The third symbol display device 81 according to the present embodiment performs a decorative effect according to the display mode of the first symbol display device 37. In addition to the variation of the symbol, the third symbol display device 81 slides a fluctuating symbol, An announcement effect such as passing a notice character for announcing the occurrence of the reach effect is performed. The effect pattern of the announcement effect is selected by the variation type counter CS3. More specifically, an effect pattern that does not add or subtract the time required for the notice effect to the fluctuation time, or subtracts the fluctuation time to shorten the time of fluctuation display, or selects the fluctuation time is selected. . In addition, similarly to the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS3 is provided with a plurality of tables having different ranges of random numbers from which the effect pattern is selected, and determines whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state. The selection ratio of each effect pattern is configured to be different depending on whether it is in the low probability state, in which area of the reserved ball storage area each random number value is stored, and the like.

  As described above, the variation time of the symbol variation is determined by the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, and the time to be added to or subtracted from the variation time is determined by the variation type counter CS3. Therefore, the final variation time until the final stop symbol stops is determined by the variation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as, for example, a loop counter which is sequentially incremented by one in a range of 0 to 250, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 250). In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt processing, and it is detected that the ball has passed through the left or right second entrance (through gate) 67. Obtained when done. The number of random number values to be won is 149, and the range is “5 to 153”. The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is executed once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 11). It is updated and updated repeatedly within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 8).

  Next, control processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process started upon power-on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer allocation started periodically (in the present embodiment, at a period of 2 ms). Interrupt processing and the above-described NMI interrupt processing.

  First, with reference to FIG. 7, a start-up process when the main controller 110 is turned on will be described. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S101). More specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer, and the control devices on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) are set in an operable state. In order to wait, a wait process (1 second in the present embodiment) is executed. Next, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S103).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided on the power supply 115 is turned on (S104). If it is turned on (S104: Yes), the process proceeds to S111. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S104: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105), and if not, it is not stored (S105: No). Since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power shutdown may not have been completed normally, the processing also shifts to S111 in this case.

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S106). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S107: No), that is, the calculated RAM determination If the value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also proceeds to S111 in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the process of S213 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S111, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S111). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game balls. After transmitting the pay-out initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process of RAM 203 (S112, S113).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 123. Therefore, if the RAM erasure switch 123 is pressed at the time of execution of the startup processing, the RAM initialization processing (S112, S113) is executed. Similarly, the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S112, S113) is executed also when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the initialization processing of the RAM (S112, S113), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S112), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S113). After the execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S110.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 123 is not turned on (S104: No), power-off occurrence information is stored (S105: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal (S104: No), S107: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S108). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of drive power cutoff is transmitted (S109), and the process proceeds to S110. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 enters a state in which the payout control of the game balls can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213. In the process of S110, the interruption is permitted, and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 8, a description will be given of a main process executed after the above-described startup process. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline, each of the processes in S201 to S206 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter updating process in S209 and S210 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, output data such as a command updated in the previous processing is transmitted (output) to each of the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices) and the hall computer 262 via the external output terminal board 261. (S201). By this external output processing (S201), for example, it is determined whether or not there is prize detection information detected by the switch reading processing of S501 (see FIG. 11). Is transmitted. In addition, by this external output processing (S201), a variation pattern command, a stop symbol command, a stop command, an effect time addition command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When transmitting or launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

  Also, by the external output process (S201), the data (setting data) set in the external output buffer 203a in accordance with the playing state in the external information processing (see FIG. 13) to be described later via the external output terminal board 261. And outputs it to the hall computer 262.

  Each of the setting data bits constituting the setting data includes a setting data bit that is set to 1 (turned on) when a ball enters the first entrance 64, and this setting data bit is set. One first entrance passage signal is formed according to the output state of the data bit.

  Specifically, the 1st entrance passage signal of 1 is such that the output state of the corresponding setting data bit is inverted from 0 (off), which is the initial state, to 1 (on), and thereafter (in the present embodiment, 52 ms) After that, when the output state is returned to 0 (off) again, it is output to the hall computer 262 via the external output terminal board 261.

  Similarly, each setting data bit constituting the setting data stored in the external output buffer 203a includes a setting data bit which is set to 1 when a big hit occurs. , A large hit signal is formed. That is, the output state of the corresponding setting data bit is inverted from 0 (off) to 1 (on) with the occurrence of the jackpot, and the output state is returned to 0 (off) again with the end of the jackpot. 1 is output to the hall computer 262 via the external output terminal board 261.

  Next, the values of the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are updated (S202). Specifically, the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are incremented by one, and are cleared to 0 when their counter values reach the maximum values (198, 240, and 162 in this embodiment). Then, the updated values of the variation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S203), and the process for displaying by the first symbol display device 37 and the second process are performed. A variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the three symbol display device 81 is executed (S204). The details of the fluctuation processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the end of the fluctuation process, a large opening opening / closing process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 in the case of the big hit state is executed (S205). In other words, the specific winning opening 65a is opened in each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning opening 65a. When any one of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of rounds.

  Next, display control processing of a second symbol (for example, a symbol of “○” or “X”) by the second symbol display device 82 is executed (S206). Briefly, on condition that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained at the timing of passing, and the second symbol display device 82 Of the second symbol is displayed on the display unit 83. Then, the lottery of the second symbol is performed based on the value of the second random number counter C4, and when the second symbol hits, the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S207). If power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S207: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 sends a power failure signal. SG1 is not output, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S208). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S208: Yes), the process proceeds to S201, and the above-described processes from S201 onward are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous main processing (S208: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing is reached. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 are repeatedly updated (S209, S210).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S209). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (738, 250 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively.

  Next, the change type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are updated (S210). Specifically, the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are incremented by one, and are cleared to 0 when their counter values reach the maximum values (198, 240, and 162 in this embodiment). Then, the updated values of the variation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively.

  Here, the execution time of each processing of S201 to S206 changes according to the state of the game, so the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4), and the variation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 can also be updated at random.

  In addition, in the process of S207, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S207: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, the NMI interrupt processing (not shown) has been executed, so that the processing at the time of power shutdown after S211 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S211), and a power shutdown notification command indicating that the power has been shut down is sent to another control device (a peripheral control device such as the payout control device 111 or the sound lamp control device 113). The message is transmitted (S212). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S213), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S214), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  Note that the processing of S207 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S201 to S206 or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S209 and S210 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. It can be started from the processing of S201. That is, the process can be started from the process of S201, similarly to the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not stored, the stack pointer is not reset in the initialization process (S101). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S201. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without malfunction or runaway of main controller 110.

  Next, the fluctuation processing (S204) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation processing (S204) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 8). In this fluctuation processing, first, it is determined whether or not a big hit is currently occurring (S301). The big hit is included during the big hit game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the big hit and during the predetermined time after the big hit game ends. If the result of the determination is that the jackpot is being hit (S301: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not during the big hit (S301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing. (S302: No), it is determined whether or not the number N of operation pending balls is larger than 0 (S303). If the number N of operation-reserved balls is 0 (S303: No), the present process is terminated as it is. If the number of active balls N> 0 (S303: Yes), the number N of active balls is subtracted by 1 (S304), and the data stored in the reserved ball storage area is shifted (S305). This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the reserved ball storage area to the execution area side, and includes a first reserved area → an execution area, a second reserved area → The data in each area is shifted in the order of the first reserved area, the third reserved area → the second reserved area, the fourth reserved area → the third reserved area, and so on. After the data shift processing, a fluctuation start processing of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S306). The change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S302, when it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the changing time has elapsed (S307). The display time during the fluctuation of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 and the addition time selected by the fluctuation type counter CS3. If it has not elapsed (S307: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S308).

  In the present embodiment, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED.If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, a display mode for turning on the red LED is set.

  Note that the fluctuation process is executed every 4 ms. However, if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the fluctuation process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by one every time the fluctuation process is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. When the counter reaches 100, the LED is turned on. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  On the other hand, if the fluctuating time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S307: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S309). The setting of the stop symbol is determined as to whether or not a large hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1. It is determined whether the symbol is in the low probability state. In the present embodiment, a red LED is turned on when a high probability state is set after a jackpot, a green LED is turned on when a low probability state is set, and a blue LED is turned on when the state is off. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stopped symbol is set in the process of S309, the fluctuation stop of the third symbol display device 81 is stopped to synchronize with the lighting of the LED in the first symbol display device 37. A command is set (S310). When receiving the stop command, the sound lamp control device 113 instructs the display control device 114 to stop. The variation of the third symbol display device 81 stops after the variation time elapses, and the variation effect of 1 in the third symbol display device 81 ends by receiving the stop command.

  Next, the change start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start processing (S306) executed in the fluctuation processing (see FIG. 9). In the change start process (S306), first, it is determined whether or not a big hit has occurred based on the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area (S401). Whether or not a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the mode at that time. As described above, during normal low probability, “373,727” is a hit value among numerical values 0 to 738 of the first random number counter C1, and at high probability, “59, 109, 163, 211, 263, 317, 367, 421, 479, 523, 631, 683, 733 "are the winning values.

  If it is determined that the hit is a big hit (S401: Yes), the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is confirmed, and the display mode at the time of the big hit is set (S402). ). In the process of S402, whether to shift to the high probability state or the low probability state after the big hit is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2. When the transition state after the big hit is set, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set. Further, based on the transition state after the jackpot, a jackpot stop symbol stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. That is, the stop symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is set by setting the transition state after the big hit in the process of S402. Note that, among the numerical values 0 to 4 of the first hit type counter C2, if the value is "0, 4", the state shifts to the low probability state, and if the value is "1, 2, 3", the state shifts to the high probability state. .

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S403). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S403, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the big hit symbol is determined. You. At this time, the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 are checked, and rough symbol variations such as normal reach, super reach, and premium reach are determined based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1. In addition to determining the fluctuation time, the fluctuation time (in other words, the number of fluctuation symbols) until the final stop symbol (in this embodiment, the middle symbol Z2) stops after the occurrence of the reach is determined based on the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2. I do.

  Note that the relationship between the value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the variation time and the relationship between the value of the second variation type counter CS2 and the variation time are defined in advance by a table or the like. However, the fluctuation time can be set using only the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 without using the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2, and can be set only by the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1. Whether to perform the setting or to set both values of both the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 is appropriately determined in accordance with the value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the game condition each time.

  If it is determined in the processing of S401 that the hit is not a big hit (S401: No), a display mode at the time of departure is set (S404). In the process of S404, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area. The effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set to reach out of front / rear, reach other than front / rear out, or complete out of reach. In the present embodiment, as described above, the range of the value corresponding to each stop pattern of the stop pattern selection counter C3 differs depending on whether the state is the high probability state, the low probability state, and the number of operation suspensions N. So the table is set.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of departure is determined (S405), the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the departure symbol. Is determined. At this time, as in the process of S403, the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 are checked, and based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1, normal reach, super reach, and premium reach are performed. And the like, and based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2, the variation time (in other words, the middle symbol Z2 in the present embodiment) until the final stop symbol (the middle symbol Z2) stops after the occurrence of the reach. , Fluctuating symbols).

  When the processing of S403 or the processing of S405 is completed, an effect time to be added to or subtracted from the fluctuation time determined by the first and second type counters CS1 and CS2 is determined (S406). At this time, the addition or subtraction of the rendering time is determined based on the value of the third type counter CS3 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display is performed. The fluctuation time of the device 81 is set. In the present embodiment, the addition and subtraction of the rendering time is determined according to the value of the third variation type counter CS3, when the variation display time is not changed, when the variation display time is added by 1 second, and when the variation display time is added by 2 seconds. In the case of addition, four types of addition values are determined, including the case where the variable display time is subtracted by 1 second.

  In the case where the variable display time is added or subtracted, a notice effect in which the expected value of the jackpot is increased in the third symbol display device 81 (for example, a slip effect in which the variable symbol is made longer than usual and the slip is accompanied by a slip effect, or the like) An effect of displaying an advance notice character, an effect of shortening the fluctuation time of a fluctuating symbol shorter than usual, and immediately stopping, and the like are performed. When the value of the first random number counter C1 is a big hit, the probability that the added value of 2 seconds is selected is set to be high, so that the player can expect the big hit by confirming the announcement effect. Can be.

  Next, a variation pattern command is set in accordance with the variation pattern (variation time) determined in the process of S403 or S405 (S407), and a stop symbol command is set in accordance with the stop symbol set in the process of S402 or S404. (S408). Then, an effect time addition command is set according to the effect time addition value determined in the process of S406 (S409), and the process returns to the fluctuation process.

  Next, FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing. This timer interrupt process is executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, for example, every 2 ms. In the timer interrupt processing, first, various pay switches are read (S501). That is, the state of the various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store the detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S502). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches a maximum value (738 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first random number counter C1, first type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and second random number counter C4 are updated (S503). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are maximum values (in this embodiment, When they reach 738, 4, 238, and 250, respectively, they are cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  After that, a start winning process (see FIG. 12) accompanying the winning in the first entrance 64 is executed (S504), and the external information for setting the first entrance passing signal to be output to the hall computer 262 is set. The process (see FIG. 13) is executed (S505), the firing control process is executed (S505), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor, and turns on / off the firing of the ball on condition that the firing stop switch for stopping the firing is not operated. This is the process of determining OFF. When the launch of the ball is on, main controller 110 instructs launch control device 112 to launch the ball.

  Here, the start winning process executed in the process of S504 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S504) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 11).

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball opening 64 (start winning) (S601). When it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S601: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the first entrance passage counter 203b (S602).

  After the processing of S602, it is determined whether or not the number N of pending balls of the first symbol display device 37 is less than an upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S603). If there is a prize in the first entrance 64 and if the number of active balls N <4 (S603: Yes), the number N of active balls is incremented by 1 (S604) and further updated in step S503. The values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are stored in the first of the free reserved areas of the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 (S605). On the other hand, whether there is no prize in the first entrance 64 (S601: No), or even if there is a prize in the first entrance 64, the number of active balls is not N <4 (S603: No). , S604 and S605 are skipped, the start winning process ends, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  Next, the external information processing executed in the processing of S505 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the external information processing (S505) executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 11).

  As shown in FIG. 13, in this external information processing (S505), first, the external output buffer 203a is cleared to 0, that is, all the setting data bits are cleared to 0, and the setting data is cleared (S1501).

  After the processing in S1501, it is checked whether the value of the signal output management counter 203c is 0 (S1502). If the value of the signal output management counter 203c is 0 (S1502: Yes) as a result of the confirmation in S1502, the hall computer 262 is in a state where the next first incoming ball passing signal can be distinguished (detectable). In this case, it is checked whether the value of the first entrance passage counter 203b is 0 (S1503).

  As a result of the check in S1503, if the value of the first entrance passage counter 203b is not 0, that is, if a value larger than 0 is confirmed (S1502: No), the ball to the first entrance 64 is confirmed. This is a case where there is a first entrance passage signal that has not been output to the hall computer 262 (not transmitted, waiting) even though the passage of the first entrance has been detected. Therefore, in such a case, after subtracting 1 from the value of the first entrance passage counter 203b (S1504), 52 is set as an initial value in the signal output management counter 203c (S1505), and the time is counted by the signal output management counter 203c. Start (measurement).

  When 52 is set as an initial value in the signal output management counter 203c as a result of the processing of S1505, thereafter, this external information processing (S505) is executed until the value of the signal output management counter 203c becomes 0. Then, the processing of S1509 is executed, and each time it is decremented by one. Since this external information processing (S505) is one of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 11) executed at intervals of 2 ms, 52 is set as the initial value in the signal output management counter 203c. As a result, a period of 104 ms is measured.

  On the other hand, if the value of the signal output management counter 203c is not 0 as a result of the confirmation in the processing of S1502, that is, if a value larger than 0 is confirmed (S1502: No), the signal output management counter 203c is counting time. Therefore, the value of the signal output management counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S1509).

  After the processing in S1505 or S1509, it is checked whether the value of the signal output management counter 203c is larger than 26 (S1506). If the value of the signal output management counter 203c is larger than 26 (S1506: Yes), the first ball entry is made. Since the first period (52 ms in this embodiment), which is the output period of the first entrance opening signal, has not yet elapsed since the start of the output of the opening passage signal, the first period in the external output buffer 203a has not yet elapsed. The setting data bit corresponding to the entrance passage signal is set to 1 (S1507), and the process proceeds to other setting processing (S1508).

  With the setting data bit corresponding to the first entrance passage signal in the external output buffer 203a set to 1 as a result of the processing in S1507, the external output processing (S201) in the main processing (see FIG. 8) in the next cycle. ) Is executed, a first entrance opening signal, which is an ON signal, is output to the hall computer 262 via the external output terminal board 261.

  On the other hand, as a result of checking in S1506, if the value of the signal output management counter 203c is 26 or less (S1506: No), the output period of the first entrance passage signal has ended, and thus S1507. , And the process proceeds to other setting processing (S1508).

  Here, as described above, every time the external information processing (S505) is executed, first, the processing of S1501 is executed, and the external output buffer 203a is cleared to 0, so the branch processing of No in S1506 is executed. As a result, if S1507 is skipped, the output state of the setting data bit corresponding to the first entrance passage signal remains at 0 (off). Therefore, when the branching process of No in S1506 is performed, the external output process (S201) in the main process (see FIG. 8) of the next cycle is not the first entrance passage signal (ON signal), The signal in the off state is output to the hall computer 262 via the external output terminal board 261.

  Therefore, according to the external information processing (S505), when the Yes branch processing in S1506 is executed, that is, after the output of the first entrance passage signal is started, the first entrance passage signal of the first entrance passage signal is started. Until the first period, which is the output period, elapses, the process of S1507 is executed. As a result, the hall computer 262 passes through the first entrance through the first period (52 ms in the present embodiment). A signal will be output.

  On the other hand, if the branching process of No in S1506 is performed, 1507 is skipped, and the second period is set as the off period after the first entrance passage signal is output over the first period. A period, that is, a period (52 ms in the present embodiment) in which the hall computer 262 can distinguish the adjacent first entrance entrance signals in chronological order is measured.

  If the value of the first entrance passage counter 203b is 0 as a result of the check in S1503 (S1502: Yes), the first entrance being counted (managed) by the signal output management counter 203c. Since there is neither a passing signal nor a first entrance port passing signal to be output, the flow directly proceeds to other setting processing (S1508).

  In the other setting processing (S1508), setting data bits corresponding to signals other than the first entrance passage signal (for example, a signal during a big hit) in the external output buffer 203a are updated. After the execution of the other setting process (S1508), the external information processing (S505) ends, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  As described above, in the external information processing (S505) executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the first first entrance passage signal is output to the hall computer 262, the first entrance passage signal is output. A value corresponding to a total period (104 ms in the present embodiment) of the first period, which is the output period, and the second period after the completion of the output of the first entrance passage signal is set as the initial value, and the signal output is performed. The management counter 203c is set so that both of these periods (the first period and the second period) can be managed by only one counter signal output management counter 203c.

  A first advantage of such a configuration is that it is not necessary to separately prepare a counter for measuring the first period and a counter for measuring the second period, thereby suppressing consumption of storage capacity in the RAM 203. The point that can be.

  As a second advantage, the value corresponding to each period is not set in the signal output management counter 203c at the timing of starting the timing of each period (the first period or the second period), and two periods (the first period or the second period) are not set. And the second period), the control load on the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 can be reduced with the output of the first entrance passage signal to the hall computer 262. Can be

  According to the external information processing (S505), the number of states in which the ball has passed through the first entrance 64 but the first entrance passage signal corresponding to the passage has not been output (waiting) is: When the value of the counter 203b is 1 or more, when the signal output management counter 203c becomes 0, the Yes branching process in S1503 is executed. Then, the output of the next first entrance opening signal which has been waiting is started.

  That is, if the ball has passed through the first entrance opening 64 but the first entrance passage signal cannot be output immediately because the first entrance passage signal was being output, the output is being performed. After the first entrance passage signal ends, the first entrance passage signal is further transmitted until a second period during which the hall computer 262 can detect the next first entrance passage signal has elapsed. Output is waited for. As a result, the hall computer 262 can reliably discriminate (detect) the individual first entrance port passing signals, and the passage (winning) of the ball to the first entrance port 64, which is detected every moment, The hall computer 262 can be made to surely recognize.

  Next, referring to FIG. 14, a first entrance passage signal (the output state of the corresponding setting data bit in external output buffer 203a is 1) output from pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment to hall computer 262. ) Will be described. FIG. 14 is a timing chart showing the output timing of the first entrance passage signal in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 14, a detection signal sg1 (ON signal) indicating that a ball has passed through the first entrance 64 is output from the first entrance switch (part of the various switches 208), that is, When the passage of the ball to the first entrance 64 is detected by the first entrance switch, the corresponding setting data bit in the external output buffer 203a is inverted from 0 to 1, and the detection signal sg1 of 1 (that is, 1) The output of one first entrance opening signal ON1 for one winning) is started.

  When the output of the first entrance passage signal ON1 is started, the process of S1505 in the external information processing (see FIG. 13) is executed, and an initial value is set in the signal output management counter 203c.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the initial value set in the signal output management counter 203c is such that the output period of the first entrance passage signal ON1 and the hall computer 262 can distinguish the next first entrance passage signal. It is a value corresponding to the total period (104 ms in this embodiment) with the off period OF1.

  During the time counting of the period by the signal output management counter 203c, it is determined that the output period (52 ms in the present embodiment) of the first entrance passage signal has elapsed by the determination processing of S1506 in the external information processing (see FIG. 13). Then, by returning the corresponding setting data bit in the external output buffer 203a from 1 to 0, the output of the first entrance passage signal ON1 ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a value corresponding to 104 ms, which is a total period of the output period of the first entrance passage signal ON1 and the OFF period OF1, is set as the initial value in the signal output management counter 203c. Even when the signal output management counter 203c measures the output period of 52 ms, the value of the signal output management counter 203c does not reach 0. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the signal output management counter 203c sets an initial value for measuring the OFF period OF1 even after the output of the first entrance passage signal ON1 ends. Without this, the off-period OF1 (52 ms in the present embodiment) can be continuously measured.

  On the other hand, before the value of the signal output management counter 203c in which the initial value has been set with the start of the output of the first entrance passage signal ON1 reaches 0, that is, in the present embodiment, the first entrance entrance. If a new detection signal sg2 is output from the first entrance switch before 104 ms elapses from the start of the output of the passing signal ON1, it waits until the value of the signal output management counter 203c reaches 0. After that, the output of the first entrance opening signal ON2 for the detection signal sg2 is started.

  That is, the first entrance passage signal ON2 for the detection signal sg2 is set in advance so that the hall computer 262 can distinguish the first entrance passage signal ON2 after the output of the first entrance passage signal ON1 ends. The output is on standby until the OFF period OF1 has elapsed. As described above, since the first entrance entrance signal ON2 is output after the OFF period OF1 has elapsed after the output of the first entrance entrance signal ON1 has been completed, the hall computer 262 outputs the first entrance entrance signal ON2. The passing signal ON2 can be reliably detected.

  When the output of the first entrance passage signal ON2 is started, similarly to the case of the first entrance passage signal ON1, the signal output management counter 203c stores the first entrance passage signal. A value corresponding to the total period of the ON period and the OFF period OF2 is set as an initial value, and a new detection signal is sent from the first entrance switch before the value of the signal output management counter 203c reaches 0. When the first entrance entrance passage signal corresponding to the new detection signal is output, the first entrance entrance passage signal corresponding to the new detection signal is output after the off-period OF2 has elapsed after the end of the output of the first entrance entrance passage signal ON2. Become.

  On the other hand, when a new detection signal sg3 is output from the first entrance switch after the value of the signal output management counter 203c becomes 0, the initial value is set in the signal output management counter 203c, The output of the first entrance passage signal ON3 for the detection signal sg3 is started.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when outputting the first entrance passage signal to the hall computer 262, the output of the first entrance passage signal (ON signal) is started. , The timing of the period is started. After the start of the timing, it is first determined whether or not a first period, which is the signal output period, has elapsed. If it is determined that the first period has elapsed, the first period is determined. Subsequent to the timing, the hall computer 262 counts a second period, which is an off period in which the adjacent first entrance signal can be distinguished in chronological order. Then, in order to determine the arrival of the second period, it is determined whether the second period has elapsed, that is, from the output of the first entrance passage signal, the first period and the second period are determined. A determination is made as to whether the summation period has elapsed.

  Therefore, the management of the output period of the first entrance passage signal (ie, the first output period) and the off period after the output of the first entrance passage signal (ie, the second output period) is completed. The management can be realized without setting the time period to be measured according to the timing of starting the time measurement in each period. Therefore, the control load applied to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 can be reduced with the output of the first entrance passage signal that is output each time a ball passes (wins) to the first entrance 64.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the output of the first entrance passage signal is started, the value corresponding to the sum period of the first period and the second period is signal output as an initial value. By setting the value in the management counter 203c and counting down every predetermined time, the one counter (signal output management counter 203c) counts both the first period and the second period.

  Therefore, there is no need to separately prepare a counter for measuring the first period and a counter for measuring the second period, and it is possible to suppress the consumption of storage capacity in the RAM 203.

  In the first embodiment, a first period preset as an output period of the first entrance passage signal and a second period preset as an off period after the end of the output of the first entrance passage signal are set. Although the periods are configured as the same value (52 ms), these periods are not limited to the same. Even if the first period is longer than the second period, the first period is The period may be shorter than the second period.

  Here, by setting the first period and the second period to the same or substantially the same value, management of each period can be facilitated. In particular, the second period is defined as the shortest period in which the hall computer 262 can distinguish the adjacent first entrance passage signals in chronological order, or a nearby period longer than the shortest period (for example, the shortest period %), The first period and the second period have the same or substantially the same value, so that there is an unoutputted (standby) first entrance passage signal. The timing at which the ball passed through the first entrance opening 64 (the timing at which the ball was detected by the first entrance switch) and the output of the first entrance passage signal which is waiting and is to be output next The difference from the timing can be reduced. Therefore, the time required for the output period and the output OFF period can be shortened as a whole with respect to one first entrance passage signal, and the data (the present embodiment illustrating the first entrance passage signal) can be reduced. In the embodiment, the acquisition efficiency of the winning data) can be improved.

  Note that, regardless of whether the length of the first period and the length of the second period are the same or different, the second period is determined by the hall computer 262 in the time series By setting the one entrance passage signal to a distinguishable period, the hall computer 262 can surely detect (discriminate) each of the first entrance passage signals adjacent in time series.

  In addition, regardless of whether the length of the first period and the length of the second period are the same or different, the second period is determined by the hall computer 262 in the time series It is preferable that one entrance ball passing signal has a shortest period that can be distinguished, or a nearby period longer than the shortest period. By setting at least the second period to be the shortest period in which the hall computer 262 can distinguish the first entrance passage signals adjacent in time series or a nearby period longer than the shortest period, When there is a 1 entrance passage signal, the difference between the timing at which the ball passed through the first entrance opening 64 and the output timing of the first entrance passage signal that is waiting and should be output next is reduced. can do. Therefore, the hall computer 262 not only can reliably detect (discriminate) each of the first entrance passage signals adjacent in time series, but also can output the next first entrance passage signal after the output of the first entrance passage signal is completed. The period until the start of the output of the ball passage signal can be reduced to the maximum or almost the maximum, and the data acquisition efficiency can be effectively improved.

  Next, a pachinko machine according to a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The pachinko machine of the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 of the above-described first embodiment are different in the appearance of the game area located at the center of the front face of the game board 13 (see FIGS. 3 and 15). Therefore, the content of the game is different. In the second embodiment, the same parts as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  15 and 16 are front views of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 15 illustrates a case where all of the ten electric auditors 661a, 662a, 663a, 664a, 665a, 691a, 692a, 693a, 694a, and 695a are in the closed position. On the other hand, FIG. 16 illustrates a case where all of the ten electric accessories 661a, 662a, 663a, 664a, 665a, 691a, 692a, 693a, 694a, and 695a are in the open position. In FIG. 16, illustration of a ball guiding nail is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment includes a base plate 60 on which a number of nails for ball guidance (omitted in FIG. 16), windmills and rails 61, 62, The winning opening 601, the upper operating opening 602, the lower operating opening 603, and ten winning units 641, 642, 643, 644, 645, 671, 672, 673, 674, 675, and the like are assembled. Here, the general winning opening 601, the upper working opening 602, the lower working opening 603, and 10 winning units 641, 642, 643, 644, 645, 671, 672, 673, 674, and 675 are the pachinko machines of the first embodiment. Like the first entrance 64 of the machine 10 and the like, it is disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a wood screw or the like.

  As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, a general winning opening 601 is provided in an upper portion of the gaming area of the gaming board 13. In the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment, when a ball is won (entered) in the general winning opening 601, ten balls are paid out as winning balls for one winning.

  Below the general winning opening 601 (the vertical direction in FIGS. 15 and 16), an upper operating opening 602 is provided. In the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the fact that a ball has won the upper stage operating port 602 indicates that an upper stage operating port switch (a part of the various switches 208 shown in FIG. 17) provided on the back side of the upper operating port 602 in the game board 13. ), 10 balls are awarded as prize balls per winning, and the five electric auditors 661a, 662a, 663a, 664a, 665a are simultaneously moved from the closed position (FIG. 15) to the open position (FIG. 15). 16).

  Below the upper operating port 602, five winning units 641, 642, 643, 644, and 645 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIGS. 15 and 16). These winning units 641, 642, 643, 644, and 645 are units configured similarly. In the following, a description will be given using the winning unit 641 as a representative.

  The winning unit 641 is provided at an upper first operating port 651 provided at an upper portion, an upper first winning port 661 provided below the upper first operating port 651, and at an entrance of the upper first winning port 661. It is a unit configured to include the electric accessory 661a. The electric accessory 661a is driven by the upper first winning opening solenoid 210a (see FIG. 17) and is in the closed position (the state shown in FIG. 15) or the open position opened in the left and right direction from the closed position (see FIG. 16). (Indicated state).

  The upper first operating port 651 is configured to be always able to enter a ball, and the fact that a ball has won the upper first operating port 651 is provided on the back side of the upper first operating port 651 in the game board 13. When detected by the first operating port switch (part of the various switches 208 shown in FIG. 17), ten balls are paid out per winning as prize balls, and the electric accessory 661a is moved from the closed position (FIG. 16). It is configured to be shifted to the open position (FIG. 15).

  The upper first winning opening 661 has its front side covered with a cover extending from the front surface of the upper first operating port 651, and is configured so that the passage of a ball is restricted according to the position of the electric accessory 661a. . Specifically, when the electric accessory 661a is at the open position (FIG. 16), the ball can pass (win) to the upper first winning opening 661, but the electric accessory 661a is closed ( In the case of FIG. 15), it is impossible for the ball to pass to the upper first winning opening 661. That is, the upper first winning opening 661 can pass through the ball only when (1) the ball wins in the upper operating port 602 or (2) the ball wins in the upper first operating port 651. .

  The fact that the ball has won the upper first winning opening 661 is determined by the upper first winning opening switch (a part of the various switches 208 shown in FIG. 17) provided on the back side of the upper first winning opening 661 in the game board 13. When detected, ten balls are paid out per winning as prize balls, and the electric accessory 661a is shifted from the open position (FIG. 16) to the closed position (FIG. 15). Therefore, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the closed electric accessory 661a is opened by the passage of the ball to the upper operating port 602 or the upper first operating port 651, and the opened electric accessory 661a is moved upward. The ball is closed again by the winning of the ball into the first winning port 661.

  As for the winning units 642 to 645, in the above description of the winning unit 641, (1) the “upper first operating port 651” is replaced with the upper operating port (upper second to upper fifth operating port) corresponding to the winning unit. 652 to 655), and (2) the "upper first winning opening 661" is replaced with an upper winning opening (upper 2nd to upper 5th winning opening 662 to 665) corresponding to the winning unit. The “winner 661a” is read as an electric auditorium (motor-operated auditors 662a to 665a) corresponding to the winning unit, and (4) the “upper first winning opening solenoid 210a” is replaced with a winning opening solenoid (upper first) corresponding to the winning unit. (5) Replace the “upper first operating port switch” with the upper operating port switch (upper second to upper fifth) corresponding to the winning unit. Work (6) The "upper first winning opening switch" is replaced with an upper winning opening switch (upper second to upper second) corresponding to the winning unit. What is necessary is just to read 5 winning port switches (all are a part of various switches 208 shown in FIG. 17).

  Below the third winning unit 643, a lower operating port 603 is provided. In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, when a ball wins in the lower operating port 603, ten balls are paid out as a prize ball per winning, and five electric auditors 691a, 692a, 693a, 694a, 695a are simultaneously sent. At a time from the closed position (FIG. 15) to the open position (FIG. 16).

  Below the lower operating port 603, five winning units 671, 672, 673, 674, and 675 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. Each of these winning units 671, 672, 673, 674, and 675 is a unit configured similarly to the above-described winning unit 641.

  Therefore, regarding the winning units 671 to 675, (1) the “upper first operating port 651” in the above description of the winning unit 641 is replaced with the lower operating port (lower first to lower fifth operating port) corresponding to the winning unit. (681) to (685), (2) "upper first winning opening 661" is replaced by a lower winning opening (lower first to fifth fifth winning opening 691 to 695) corresponding to the winning unit, and (3) "motorized". The "winner 661a" is read as an electric auditorium (motor-operated 691a to 695a) corresponding to the winning unit. (4) The "upper first winning opening solenoid 210a" is replaced with a lower winning opening solenoid (lower) corresponding to the winning unit. The first to lower fifth winning opening solenoids 210f to 210j (see FIG. 17) are read and (5) the "upper first operating opening switch" is replaced by the lower operating opening switch (lower first to lower first operating switch) corresponding to the winning unit. (6) Replace the “upper first winning port switch” with the lower winning port switch (lower first to lower) corresponding to the winning unit. It may be replaced with a fifth winning opening switch (all of them are a part of various switches 208 shown in FIG. 17).

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine of the second embodiment, all five upper winning ports (upper first to fifth upper winning ports 661 to 665) are in a state where winning is possible by winning a ball to the upper operating port 602. An advantageous gaming state occurs. Similarly, when a ball wins in the lower operating port 603, all five lower winning ports (lower first to fifth lower winning ports 691 to 695) are in a winable state, and the most advantageous gaming state is generated. It will be.

  The pachinko machine of the present embodiment outputs a specific operating port passage signal to the hall computer 262 every time a ball wins in the upper operating port 602 or the lower operating port 603 capable of generating the most advantageous gaming state. It is configured as follows. On the other hand, when the hall computer 262 receives the specific operating port passing signal, the hall computer 262 displays data displayed around the pachinko machine (for example, above the pachinko machine) over the ON period of the received specific operating port passing signal. A control signal is output to make the container blink.

  In the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the output period (ON period) of one specific operation port passage signal is initially set to 30 s. However, as will be described in detail later, when a ball is detected in the upper working port 602 or the lower working port 603 at a relatively short interval, the output period of the specific working port passing signal output during or after the output. Is shorter than the initial set value (30 s in the present embodiment).

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, even when a ball wins in the upper operating port 602 or the lower operating port 603 at relatively short intervals, the winning timing and the output start timing of the specific operating port passing signal (or , The reception timing of the specific operation port passing signal in the hall computer 262).

  FIG. 17 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment. The RAM 203 of the main controller 110 according to the second embodiment includes an external output buffer 203a, a signal output management counter 203c, a specific operating port passage counter 203d, an upper first winning port opening flag 203e, and an upper second winning port. Opening flag 203f, upper third winning opening opening flag 203g, upper fourth winning opening opening flag 203h, upper fifth winning opening opening flag 203i, lower first winning opening opening flag 203j, Lower second winning opening flag 203k, lower third winning opening flag 203l, lower fourth winning opening flag 203m, lower fifth opening flag 203n, and the contents of the internal register of MPU 201 Area where the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 and the like are stored, and values of various flags, counters, I / Os, etc. are stored.憶 is the working area and a (working area).

  The specific operation port passage counter 203d is a counter that counts a state in which a ball has passed through the upper operation port 602 or the lower operation port 603, but the specific operation port passage signal corresponding to the passage has not been output. Note that the “specific operating port passage signal” is an ON signal (for a maximum of 30 seconds in the present embodiment) output for a single passage through the upper operating port 602 or the lower operating port 603 (FIG. 25).

  After being cleared to 0 when the power is turned on, the specific operation port passage counter 203d is reset each time a ball enters the upper operation port 602 or the lower operation port 603 (that is, the upper operation port switch or the lower operation port switch (various switches). Each time the ON of a part of 208 is detected, 1 is added, and each time one specific working port passage signal is output, 1 is subtracted in external information processing (see FIG. 24) described later.

  Therefore, if the value of the specific operating port passage counter 203d is 0, the number of specific operating port passing signals corresponding to the number of times the ball has passed to the upper operating port 602 or the lower operating port 603 has already been transmitted to the hall computer 262. To indicate that On the other hand, when the specific operating port passage counter 203d indicates a value of 1 or more, the passage of the ball to the upper operating port 602 or the lower operating port 603 by the number indicated by the specific operating port passing counter 203d is detected. Regardless, it indicates that there is a specific operating port passage signal that has not been output (not transmitted, waiting) to the hall computer 262.

  The upper first winning opening opening flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the electric accessory 661a provided at the entrance of the upper first winning opening 661 is opening, and the electric accessory 661a is opening. Indicates ON in some cases. Similarly, the upper second to upper fifth winning opening flag flags 203f to 203i are flags indicating whether or not the motorized bonuses 662a to 665a are being opened, respectively, and indicate ON when being opened. .

  The lower first winning opening opening flag 203j is a flag indicating whether or not the electric accessory 691a provided at the entrance of the lower first winning opening 691 is opening, and the electric accessory 691a is opening. Indicates ON in some cases. Similarly, the lower second to lower fifth winning opening opening flags 203k to 203n are flags indicating whether or not the motorized characters 692a to 695a are being opened, respectively, and indicate that they are on when being opened. .

  The input / output port 205 of the main control device 110 includes a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and an upper and lower first drive for opening and closing the electric accessory 661a. Upper and lower winning opening solenoids 210b for opening and closing the winning combination solenoid 210a and electric accessory 662a and upper and lower third winning opening solenoids 210c for opening and closing the electric combination 663a for driving the opening and closing of the electric accessory 664a. The upper fourth winning opening solenoid 210d, the upper fifth winning opening solenoid 210e for opening and closing the electric accessory 665a, the lower first winning opening solenoid 210f for opening and closing the electric accessory 691a, and the electric accessory 692a. The lower second winning opening solenoid 210g for opening and closing drive and the lower second opening and closing drive for the electric accessory 693a. The winning opening solenoid 210h, the lower fourth winning opening solenoid 210i for opening and closing the electric accessory 694a, the lower fifth winning opening solenoid 210j for opening and closing the electric accessory 695a, and the external output terminal plate 261 are connected. I have.

  Next, control processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. The processing executed by the MPU 201 of the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment also includes a start-up process started upon power-on, and a post-start-up process after the start-up process, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. The main processing is broadly divided into a main processing to be executed, a timer interrupt processing started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 ms), and an NMI interrupt processing.

  Here, the start-up process and the NMI process executed by the pachinko machine main controller 110 of the second embodiment are the start-up process (see FIG. 7) and the NMI process executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. This is the same processing as (not shown). The main processing executed by the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine of the second embodiment is the same as that of S202 to S206, S209, and S210 in the main processing (see FIG. 8) executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. The processing is omitted. That is, in the main processing executed by the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine of the second embodiment, the processing of S207 is executed after the execution of the external output processing (S201).

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process according to the second embodiment. The timer processing of the second embodiment is also executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 at predetermined intervals (every 2 ms in the present embodiment), similarly to the timer interrupt processing of the first embodiment (see FIG. 11). Is done.

  In the timer interrupt processing of the second embodiment, first, a switch read processing is executed (S501). In this switch reading process (S501), various switches 208 (for example, upper-stage operation port switch, upper first to fifth operation-port switches, upper first to fifth winning port switches, lower-stage operation port switch, lower first to fifth operation port switches) 5 operating port switch, lower first to fifth winning port switch, etc.) are read, and the state of the switch is determined to obtain detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, a switch monitoring process for performing various settings according to the winning detection information acquired by the switch reading process (S501) is executed (S511), and various signals such as a specific operating port passing signal to be output to the hall computer 262 are set. The external information processing for performing the setting of each setting data bit of the external output buffer 203a is executed (S512), the emission control processing is executed (S506), and the timer interrupt processing ends.

  Here, the switch monitoring process (S511) described above will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 19 and 20 are flowcharts showing the switch monitoring process (S511) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18) of the second embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 19, in the switch monitoring process (S511) of the second embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not a ball has passed an upper-stage operation port switch (a part of various switches 208) provided in the upper-stage operation port 602. It is confirmed (S2501), and if it has passed (S2501: Yes), the upper-stage working port switch process described later is executed (S2502).

  After execution of the upper operation port switch processing (S2502) or as a result of the confirmation in the processing of S2501, if a ball has not passed through the upper operation port switch (S2501: No), the upper first operation port 651 is provided. It is checked whether the ball has passed the first operation port switch (part of the various switches 208) that has been set (S2503). As a result of the check in S2503, if the ball has passed the upper first operation port switch (S2503: Yes), the upper first operation port switch processing described later is executed (S2504).

  After the execution of the upper first operation port switch (S2504) or as a result of the confirmation in the processing of S2503, if the ball has not passed through the upper first operation port switch (S2503: No), the upper second operation It is checked whether the ball has passed the upper second operation port switch (part of the various switches 208) provided in the port 652 (S2505). As a result of the confirmation in S2505, if the ball has passed the upper second operation port switch (S2505: Yes), the upper second operation port switch processing described later is executed (S2506).

  After the execution of the upper second operating port switch processing (S2506) or as a result of the confirmation in the processing of S2505, if a ball has not passed through the upper second operating port switch (S2505: No), the upper third operating port switch is executed. It is checked whether the ball has passed the upper third operating port switch (part of the various switches 208) provided in the port 653 (S2507). As a result of the check in S2507, if the ball has passed the upper third operating port switch (S2507: Yes), an upper third operating port switch process described later is executed (S2508).

  After the execution of the upper third operating port switch process (S2508) or as a result of checking by the processing of S2507, if the ball has not passed through the upper third operating port switch (S2507: No), the upper fourth operating port switch is executed. It is confirmed whether the ball has passed the upper fourth operation port switch (a part of various switches 208) provided in the port 654 (S2509). As a result of the confirmation in the processing of S2509, if the ball has passed the upper fourth operating port switch (S2509: Yes), the upper fourth operating port switch processing described later is executed (S2510).

  After the execution of the upper fourth operation port switch process (S2510) or as a result of the confirmation in the processing of S2509, if the ball has not passed through the upper fourth operation port switch (S2509: No), the upper fifth operation It is checked whether the ball has passed the upper fifth operation port switch (a part of various switches 208) provided in the port 655 (S2511). As a result of the confirmation in the processing of S2511, if the ball has passed through the upper fifth working port switch (S2511: Yes), the upper fifth working port switch processing described later is executed (S2512).

  After the execution of the upper fifth working port switch process (S2512) or as a result of the confirmation in the processing of S2511, if the ball has not passed through the upper fifth working port switch (S2511: No), the upper first prize. It is checked whether the ball has passed the upper first winning port switch (a part of various switches 208) provided in the port 661 (S2513). As a result of the confirmation in S2513, if the ball has passed the upper first winning opening switch (S2513: Yes), the upper first winning opening switch process described later is executed (S2514).

  After execution of the upper first winning opening switch process (S2514), or as a result of the processing of S2513, if the ball has not passed through the upper first winning opening switch (S2513: No), the upper second winning opening switch. It is checked whether the ball has passed the upper second winning opening switch (a part of various switches 208) provided in the mouth 662 (S2515). If the ball has passed through the upper second winning opening switch as a result of the confirmation in S2515 (S2515: Yes), the upper second winning opening switch process described later is executed (S2516).

  After the execution of the upper second winning opening switch process (S2516) or as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2515, if the ball does not pass through the upper second winning opening switch (S2515: No), the upper third winning opening. It is checked whether the ball has passed the upper third winning port switch (part of various switches 208) provided in the port 663 (S2517). If the ball has passed through the upper third winning opening switch as a result of the confirmation in S2517 (S2517: Yes), the upper third winning opening switch process described later is executed (S2518).

  After the execution of the upper third winning opening switch process (S2518) or as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2517, if the ball has not passed through the upper third winning opening switch (S2517: No), the upper fourth winning opening. It is checked whether the ball has passed the upper fourth winning opening switch (a part of various switches 208) provided in the mouth 664 (S2519). If the ball has passed through the upper fourth winning opening switch as a result of the check in S2519 (S2519: Yes), the upper fourth winning opening switch process described later is executed (S2520).

  After execution of the upper fourth winning opening switch process (S2520) or as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2519, if the ball has not passed through the upper fourth winning opening switch (S2519: No), the upper fifth winning opening It is checked whether the ball has passed the upper fifth winning port switch (a part of various switches 208) provided in the port 665 (S2521). If the ball has passed through the upper fifth winning opening switch as a result of the check in S2521, the upper fifth winning opening switch process described later is executed (S2522).

  After execution of the upper fifth winning opening switch process (S2522), or as a result of checking by the process of S2521, if the ball has not passed through the upper fifth winning opening switch (S2521: No), the process of S2523 ( (See FIG. 20).

  As shown in FIG. 20, in S2523, it is checked whether or not the ball has passed the lower operation port switch (part of the various switches 208) provided in the lower operation port 603 (S2523). As a result of the confirmation in the processing of S2523, if the ball has passed the lower operation port switch (S2523: Yes), the lower operation port switch processing described later is executed (S2524).

  After the lower operation port switch processing (S2524) is performed or as a result of the confirmation in the processing of S2523, if the ball has not passed through the lower operation port switch (S2523: No), the lower first operation port 681 is provided. It is checked whether the ball has passed the lower first operation port switch (part of the various switches 208) (S2525). If the ball has passed through the lower first operation port switch as a result of the confirmation in the processing of S2525 (S2525: Yes), the lower first operation port switch processing described later is executed (S2526).

  After the execution of the lower first operation port switch process (S2526) or as a result of the confirmation in the processing of S2525, if the ball has not passed through the lower first operation port switch (S2525: No), the lower second operation is performed. It is checked whether the ball has passed the lower second operating port switch (part of the various switches 208) provided in the port 682 (S2527). As a result of the confirmation in S2527, if the ball has passed through the lower second operation port switch (S2527: Yes), the lower second operation port switch processing described later is executed (S2528).

  After the execution of the lower second operating port switch process (S2528) or as a result of the confirmation in the processing of S2527, if the ball has not passed through the lower second operating port switch (S2527: No), the lower third operating port switch is executed. It is checked whether the ball has passed the lower third operating port switch (part of the various switches 208) provided at the port 683 (S2529). As a result of the confirmation in the processing of S2529, if the ball has passed the lower third operating port switch (S2529: Yes), the lower third operating port switch processing described later is executed (S2530).

  After the execution of the lower third operating port switch process (S2530) or as a result of the confirmation in the processing of S2529, if the ball has not passed through the lower third operating port switch (S2529: No), the lower fourth operating port switch is activated. It is checked whether the ball has passed the lower fourth operation port switch (a part of various switches 208) provided in the port 684 (S2531). As a result of the confirmation in S2531, if the ball has passed the lower fourth operating port switch (S2531: Yes), the lower fourth operating port switch processing described later is executed (S2532).

  After execution of the lower fourth operating port switch process (S2532) or as a result of the confirmation in the processing of S2531, if the ball has not passed through the lower fourth operating port switch (S2531: No), the lower fifth operating port switch is activated. It is checked whether the ball has passed the lower fifth working port switch (a part of various switches 208) provided in the port 685 (S2533). As a result of the check in S2533, if the ball has passed the lower fifth working port switch (S2533: Yes), the lower fifth working port switch processing described later is executed (S2534).

  After the execution of the lower fifth operating port switch process (S2534) or as a result of the confirmation in the processing of S2533, if the ball has not passed through the lower fifth operating port switch (S2533: No), the lower first prize is won. It is checked whether the ball has passed the lower first winning port switch (part of the various switches 208) provided in the port 691 (S2535). If the ball has passed through the lower first winning opening switch as a result of the confirmation in S2535 (S2535: Yes), the lower first winning opening switch process described later is executed (S2536).

  After execution of the lower first winning opening switch process (S2536) or as a result of checking by the processing of S2535, if the ball has not passed through the lower first winning opening switch (S2535: No), the lower second winning opening switch. It is checked whether the ball has passed the lower second winning opening switch (a part of the various switches 208) provided in the mouth 692 (S2537). As a result of the check in S2537, if the ball has passed the lower second winning opening switch (S2537: Yes), a lower second winning opening switch process described later is executed (S2538).

  After execution of the lower second winning opening switch process (S2538) or as a result of checking by the process of S2537, if the ball has not passed through the lower second winning opening switch (S2537: No), the lower third winning opening is determined. It is checked whether the ball has passed the lower third winning port switch (part of the various switches 208) provided in the port 693 (S2539). If the ball has passed through the lower third winning opening switch as a result of the check in S2539 (S2539: Yes), the lower third winning opening switch process described later is executed (S2540).

  After execution of the lower third winning opening switch process (S2540) or as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2539, if the ball has not passed through the lower third winning opening switch (S2539: No), the lower fourth winning opening is determined. It is checked whether the ball has passed the lower fourth winning opening switch (part of the various switches 208) provided in the mouth 694 (S2541). If the ball has passed through the lower fourth winning opening switch as a result of the confirmation in S2541 (S2541: Yes), the lower fourth winning opening switch process described later is executed (S2542).

  After execution of the lower fourth winning opening switch process (S2542) or as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2541, if the ball has not passed through the lower fourth winning opening switch (S2541: No), the lower fifth winning opening is determined. It is checked whether the ball has passed the lower fifth winning opening switch (part of the various switches 208) provided in the mouth 695 (S2543). If the ball has passed through the lower fifth winning opening switch as a result of the check in S2543 (S2543: Yes), the lower fifth winning opening switch process described later is executed (S2544).

  After the execution of the lower fifth winning opening switch process (S2544) or as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2543, if the ball has not passed through the lower fifth winning opening switch (S2543: No), the general winning opening 601 is set. Then, a process (other switch process) corresponding to the detection of the sphere by another switch such as a switch (not shown) for detecting the passage of the sphere to the device is executed (S2545), and the switch monitoring process (S511) is ended.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 21A, the above-described upper-stage operation port switch processing (S2502) will be described. FIG. 21A is a flowchart showing the upper-stage operation port switch processing (S2502) executed in the switch monitoring processing (FIGS. 19 and 20).

  As shown in FIG. 21A, in the upper stage opening switch process (S2502), first, 1 is added to a prize ball counter (not shown) (S2601). The prize ball counter is a counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203, and counts the number of prizes (number of prizes) to obtain a prize ball. The prize ball counter is configured to be cleared to 0 when the power is turned on and when a prize ball command to be output to the payout control device 111 is set.

  After the processing of S2601, 1 is added to the specific operating port passage counter 203d (S2602), the upper first to fifth fifth winning port solenoids 210a to 210e are turned on (S2603), and the upper first to fifth fifth winning ports are being opened. The flags 203e to 203i are turned on (S2604), and the upper-stage operation port switch process (S2502) ends.

  Therefore, when a ball wins in the upper operating port 602, the process of S2603 is executed, and as a result, the motorized actors 661a to 665a respectively attached to the upper first to upper fifth winning ports 661 to 665 are simultaneously transmitted. Open to the public.

  Further, the lower-stage operation port switch process (S2524) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21B is a flowchart showing the lower-stage operation port switch processing (S2524) executed in the switch monitoring processing (FIGS. 19 and 20).

  As shown in FIG. 21 (b), in the lower-stage operation port switch process (S2524), first, 1 is added to a prize ball counter (not shown) (S2611), and 1 is added to the specific operation port passage counter 203d. (S2612).

  After the processing of S2612, the lower first to lower fifth winning opening solenoids 210f to 210j are turned on (S2613), and the lower first to lower fifth winning opening opening flags 203j to 203n are turned on (S2614). The mouth switch processing (S2524) ends.

  Therefore, when a ball wins in the lower operating port 603, the process of S2613 is executed, and as a result, the motorized objects 691a to 695a associated with the lower first to lower fifth winning ports 691 to 695 are simultaneously transmitted. Open to the public.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 22A, the above-described upper first operation port switch process (S2504) will be described. FIG. 22A is a flowchart showing the upper first working port switch process (S2504) executed in the switch monitoring process (FIGS. 19 and 20).

  As shown in FIG. 22A, in the upper first operating port switch process (S2504), first, one is added to a prize ball counter (not shown) (S2621), and the upper first winning port opening flag is set. It is checked whether the switch 203e is off (S2622).

  If the upper first winning opening opening flag 203e is turned off as a result of the confirmation in the processing of S2622 (S2622: Yes), the electric accessory 661a attached to the upper first winning opening 661 is in the closed position, and therefore the open position. The upper first winning port solenoid 210a is turned on (S2623), the upper first winning port opening flag 203e is turned on (S2624), and the upper first operating port switch process (S2504) is ended.

  On the other hand, if the upper first winning opening opening flag 203e is turned on as a result of the confirmation in the processing of S2622 (S2622: No), the electric accessory 661a attached to the upper first winning opening 661 is already at the opening position. Therefore, the first operation port switch processing (S2504) is terminated without performing the processing of S2623 and S2624.

  Therefore, when a ball wins in the upper first operating port 651, the processing of S2623 is executed, and as a result, only the electric accessory 661a attached to the upper first operating port 661 is opened.

  The upper second operating port switch process (S2506), the upper third operating port switch process (S2508), the upper fourth operating port switch process (S2510), and the upper fifth operating port switch process (S2512) are also described above. The same processing as the upper first operation port switch processing (S2504) is performed. That is, in the upper first operating port switch process (S2504), the “upper first winning opening solenoid 210a” is replaced with a winning opening solenoid (upper second to upper fifth winning opening) corresponding to the operating port switch that detected the passage of the ball. Solenoids 210b to 210e) are read, and the “upper first winning port opening flag 203e” is changed to a winning port opening flag (upper second to upper fifth winning port opening) corresponding to the operating port switch that detected the passage of the ball. Flags 203f to 203i) may be read.

  Therefore, when a ball wins in the upper second operating port 652, only the electric accessory 662a attached to the upper second operating port 662 is opened as a result of the upper second operating port switch process (S2506). Similarly, when a ball wins in the upper third operating port 653, only the electric accessory 663a attached to the upper third winning port 663 is opened as a result of the upper third operating port switch process (S2508). . When a ball wins in the upper fourth operating port 654, only the electric accessory 664a attached to the upper fourth operating port 664 is opened as a result of the upper fourth operating port switch process (S2510). When the ball wins in the fifth operating port 655, only the electric accessory 665a attached to the upper fifth operating port 665 is opened as a result of the upper fifth operating port switch process (S2512).

  The lower first operation port switch process (S2526) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22B is a flowchart showing the lower first operating port switch process (S2526) executed in the switch monitoring process (FIGS. 19 and 20).

  As shown in FIG. 22B, in this lower first operating port switch process (S2526), first, 1 is added to a prize ball counter (not shown) (S2631), and the lower first winning port opening flag is opened. It is checked whether 203j is off (S2632).

  If the lower first winning opening opening flag 203j is turned off as a result of the confirmation in the processing of S2632 (S2632: Yes), the electric accessory 691a attached to the lower first winning opening 691 is in the closed position. Then, the lower first winning port solenoid 210f is turned on (S2633), the lower first winning port opening flag 203j is turned on (S2634), and the lower first operating port switch process (S2526) is ended.

  On the other hand, if the lower first winning opening opening flag 203j is on (S2632: No) as a result of the confirmation in the processing of S2632, the electric accessory 691a attached to the lower first winning opening 691 is already at the opening position. Therefore, without performing the processing of S2633 and S2634, the lower first operation port switch processing (S2526) is ended.

  Therefore, when a ball wins in the lower first operating port 681, the process of S2633 is executed, and as a result, only the electric accessory 691a attached to the lower first operating port 691 is opened.

  The lower second operating port switch process (S2528), the lower third operating port switch process (S2530), the lower fourth operating port switch process (S2532), and the lower fifth operating port switch process (S2534) are also described above. The same processing as the lower first operation port switch processing (S2526) is performed. That is, in the lower first operating port switch process (S2526), the “lower first winning port solenoid 210f” is replaced with a winning port solenoid (lower second to lower fifth winning port) corresponding to the operating port switch that has detected the passage of the ball. Solenoids 210g to 210j) are read, and the “lower first winning port opening flag 203j” is changed to a winning port opening flag (lower second to lower fifth winning port opening lower) corresponding to the operating port switch that detected the passage of the ball. Flags 203k to 203n).

  Therefore, when a ball wins in the lower second operating port 682, as a result of the lower second operating port switch process (S2528), only the electric accessory 692a attached to the lower second operating port 692 is opened. Similarly, when a ball wins in the lower third operating port 683, only the electric accessory 693a attached to the lower third operating port 693 is opened as a result of the lower third operating port switch process (S2530). . Further, when the ball wins the lower fourth operating port 684, only the electric accessory 694a attached to the lower fourth operating port 694 is opened as a result of the lower fourth operating port switch process (S2532), When the ball has won the fifth operating port 685, only the electric accessory 695a attached to the lower fifth operating port 695 is opened as a result of the lower fifth operating port switch process (S2534).

  Next, the upper first winning opening switch process (S2514) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23A is a flowchart showing the upper first winning opening switch process (S2514) executed in the switch monitoring process (FIGS. 19 and 20).

  As shown in FIG. 23A, in the upper first winning port switch process (S2514), first, 1 is added to a winning ball counter (not shown) (S2641), and the upper first winning port solenoid 210a is set. It is turned off (S2642). After the processing of S2642, the upper first winning opening opening flag 203e is turned off (S2642), and the upper first winning opening switch processing (S2514) ends.

  Therefore, when the ball has won the upper first winning opening 661, the process of S2642 is executed, and as a result, the electric accessory 661a of the opened upper first winning opening 661 is closed. .

  The upper second winning opening switch process (S2516), the upper third winning opening switch process (S2518), the upper fourth winning opening switch process (S2520), and the upper fifth winning opening switch process (S2522) are also described above. The same processing as the above first winning port switch processing (S2514) is performed. That is, in the upper first winning opening switch process (S2514), the "upper first winning opening solenoid 210a" is replaced with a winning opening solenoid (upper second to upper fifth winning opening) corresponding to the winning opening switch that detects the passage of the ball. Solenoids 210b to 210e) are read, and the “upper first winning port opening flag 203e” is changed to a winning port opening flag (upper second to upper fifth opening port opening) corresponding to the winning port switch that detects the passage of the ball. Flags 203f to 203i) may be read.

  Therefore, when a ball wins in the upper second winning opening 662, as a result of the upper second winning opening switch process (S2516), the electric accessory 662a of the opened upper second winning opening 662 is closed. . Similarly, when a ball wins in the upper third winning opening 663, as a result of the upper third winning opening switch processing (S2518), the electric accessory 663a of the opened upper third winning opening 663 is closed. You. In addition, when the ball has won the upper fourth winning opening 664, as a result of the upper fourth winning opening switch process (S2520), the electric accessory 664a of the opened upper fourth winning opening 664 is closed, When the ball wins in the upper fifth winning opening 665, as a result of the upper fifth winning opening switch processing (S2522), the opened electric accessory 665a of the upper fifth winning opening 665 is closed. Become.

  The lower first winning opening switch process (S2536) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23B is a flowchart showing the lower first winning opening switch process (S2536) executed in the switch monitoring process (FIGS. 19 and 20).

  As shown in FIG. 23B, in the lower first winning opening switch process (S2536), first, 1 is added to a winning ball counter (not shown) (S2651), and the lower first winning opening solenoid 210f is set. It is turned off (S2652). After the process of S2652, the lower first winning opening opening flag 203j is turned off (S2642), and the lower first winning opening switch process (S2536) ends.

  Therefore, when a ball wins in the lower first winning opening 691, the process of S2652 is executed, and as a result, the electric accessory 691a of the opened lower first winning opening 691 is closed. .

  The lower second winning opening switch process (S2538), the lower third winning opening switch process (S2540), the lower fourth winning opening switch process (S2542), and the lower fifth winning opening switch process (S2544) are also described above. The same processing as the lower first winning opening switch processing (S2536) is performed. That is, in the lower first winning opening switch process (S2536), the “lower first winning opening solenoid 210f” is replaced with a winning opening solenoid (lower second to lower fifth winning opening) corresponding to the winning opening switch that detects the passage of the ball. Solenoids 210g to 210j) are read, and the “lower first winning port opening flag 203j” is changed to a winning port opening flag (lower second to lower fifth winning port opening) corresponding to the winning port switch that detects the passage of the ball. Flags 203k to 203n).

  Therefore, when the ball wins in the lower second winning opening 692, as a result of the lower second winning opening switch process (S2538), the electric accessory 692a of the opened lower second winning opening 692 is closed. . Similarly, when a ball wins in the lower third winning opening 693, as a result of the lower third winning opening switch process (S2540), the electric accessory 693a of the opened lower third winning opening 693 is closed. You. Further, when the ball wins the lower fourth winning opening 694, as a result of the lower fourth winning opening switch process (S2542), the electric accessory 694a of the opened lower fourth winning opening 694 is closed, When the ball has won the lower fifth prize port 695, as a result of the lower fifth prize port switch process (S2544), the electric accessory 695a of the opened lower fifth prize port 695 is closed. Become.

  Next, the above-described external information processing (S512) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the external information processing (S512) executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 18) of the second embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 24, in the external information processing (S512) of the second embodiment, first, the external output buffer 203a is set to 0 as in the processing of S501 of the external information processing (see FIG. 13) of the first embodiment. A clearing process is executed (S1521).

  After the processing in S1521, it is checked whether the value of the specific operation port passage counter 203d is 0 (S1522). As a result of the check in S1522, if the value of the specific working port passage counter 203d is not 0, that is, if a value larger than 0 is confirmed (S1522: No), either the upper working port 602 or the lower working port 603 is used. Despite the detection of the passage of the ball to the hall computer 262, there is a specific operating port passage signal that has not been output (not transmitted, waiting) to the hall computer 262. In this case, the value of the signal output management counter 203c Is determined to be 0 (S1523).

  If the value of the signal output management counter 203c is 0 as a result of the check in S1523 (S1523: Yes), there is no specific operation port passage signal that is being managed (timed) by the signal output management counter 203c. Then, 15250 is set as an initial value in the signal output management counter 203c (S1529), and time counting (measurement) by the signal output management counter 203c is started.

  Here, the value of the signal output management counter 203c is decremented (counted down) by one every 2 ms, which is the execution interval of the external information processing (S512), so the initial value set in the signal output management counter 203c by the processing of S1529. The value corresponds to a period of 30.5 s (30500 ms).

  Note that, as a result of the process of S1529, the initial value corresponding to the period of 30.5 s set in the signal output management counter 203c is the first output period of the initial setting for one specific working-port entrance signal. This is a value corresponding to the total period of the period (30 s) and the second period (0.5 s) set in advance as the off period after the end of the output of the specific operation port passing signal.

  In the present embodiment, during the second period, which is the off period after the end of the output of the specific operating port passing signal, the player turns on and off the data display controlled by the hall computer 262 that has received the specific operating port passing signal. Is set to 0.5 s in order to make the off period visually distinguishable in units of the specific operation port passing signal adjacent in time series.

  In addition, the hall computer 262 of the present embodiment is configured to output a control signal so as to blink a data indicator set around the pachinko machine over a reception period of the specific operation port passage signal (ON signal). ing. That is, the output period of the specific operation port passage signal from the main control device 110 corresponds to the blinking period of the data display. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by setting the output period (first period) of the initial setting of the specific operating port passing signal to 30 s, the data for one winning of the ball to the upper operating port 602 or the lower operating port 603 is obtained. The indicator will blink for a maximum of 30s, the first period.

  After the processing of S1529, the value of the specific operation port passage counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S1530), and then the setting data bit corresponding to the specific operation port passage signal in the external output buffer 203a is set to 1 (S1531).

  With the setting data bit corresponding to the specific operation port passage signal in the external output buffer 203a set to 1 as a result of the processing of S1531, the external output processing (S201) in the main processing (see FIG. 8) of the next cycle is performed. When executed, a specific operation port passing signal, which is an ON signal, is output to the hall computer 262 via the external output terminal board 261.

  Therefore, when the value of the specific operation port passage counter 203d is not 0 and the value of the signal output management counter 203c is 0, it is the output timing of the specific operation port passage signal that has not been output or is on standby. A period of 30.5 s is set as an initial value to the signal output management counter 203c by the processing of S1529, and the output of the specific operating port passage signal is started.

  After the processing in S1531, the other setting processing (S1528) is executed, and the external information processing (S512) ends. In the other setting processing (S1528), setting data bits corresponding to signals other than the specific operation port passage signal in the external output buffer 203a (for example, a signal indicating that a special game state is being performed) are updated. After execution of the other setting processing (S1528), the external information processing (S512) ends, and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 18).

  On the other hand, if the value of the signal output management counter 203c is not 0 as a result of the confirmation in the processing of S1523, that is, if a value greater than 0 is confirmed (S1523: No), the signal is not output to the hole computer 262 (not transmitted, This indicates that the specific output port passage signal is being managed by the signal output management counter 203c in a state where the specific operation port passage signal (standby) is present. In such a case, first, the value of the signal output management counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S1524), and it is confirmed whether the value of the signal output management counter 203c is larger than 15000 (S1525).

  If the value of the signal output management counter 203c is larger than 15000 as a result of the check in S1525 (S1525: Yes), after the initial value is set in the signal output management counter 203c in S1529, that is, the specific operation port passing signal Since the output of (1) has been started, the period of 0.5 s has not yet elapsed, so in such a case, the flow shifts to the processing of S1531, and the output of the specific operating port passage signal is continued (S1531).

  On the other hand, if the value of the signal output management counter 203c is less than or equal to 15000 as a result of the confirmation in the processing of S1525 (S1525: No), a period of 0.5 s has elapsed since the output of the specific operating port passage signal was started. Then, it is checked whether the value of the signal output management counter 203c is smaller than 250 (S1526).

  If the value of the signal output management counter 203c is 250 or more as a result of the confirmation in the processing of S1526 (S1526: No), in such a case, if there is a specific operating port passing signal that has not been output to the hole computer 262, then 1 Indicates that the specific operation port passing signal is being output and at least 0.5 s has elapsed from the start of the output. In such a case, 250 is reset in the signal output management counter 203c (S1527), and the process proceeds to other setting processing (S1528).

  In this case (that is, when 250 is reset to the signal output management counter 203c by the processing of S1527), the processing of S1531 is not executed, and the output state of the setting data bit corresponding to the specific operation port passing signal is 0 ( Off). As a result, when the external output processing (S201) in the main processing (see FIG. 8) of the next cycle is executed, a signal in an OFF state is sent to the external output terminal board 261 instead of a specific operating port passing signal (ON signal). Output to the hall computer 262 via the

  Therefore, when there is a specific operating port passing signal that is being output and there is a specific operating port passing signal that has not been output, the output period of the specific operating port passing signal that is being output is set in advance as the third period. If it is equal to or more than 0.5 s, regardless of the initial value set in the signal output management counter 203c by the processing of S1529, after the signal output management counter 203c is reset to 250 by the processing of S1527, the specific operation is performed. The output of the mouth passing signal is interrupted.

  In the present embodiment, the third period visually distinguishes the blinking of the data display controlled by the hall computer 262 that has received the specific operating port passing signal by the unit of the specific operating port passing signal. The period is set to 0.5 s in order to obtain the period.

  On the other hand, if the value of the signal output management counter 203c is smaller than 250 as a result of the check in S1526 (S1526: Yes), the second period (0.5s) after the end of the output of the specific operation port passing signal. Therefore, the process proceeds to another setting process (S1528) while the output state of the setting data bit corresponding to the specific operation port passing signal is set to 0 (off).

  Here, as described above, when 250 is reset to the signal output management counter 203c by the processing of S1527, in the external information processing (S512) executed at the next timing (ie, after 2 ms), the signal output management is performed. Since the value of the counter 203c is 249, the process moves to the No side in the determination processing of S1526. In other words, after the signal output management counter 203c is reset to 250 by the processing of S1527 and the output of the specific operating port passing signal is interrupted, 0.5 s is set as the OFF period after the output of the specific operating port passing signal ends. It will be timed.

  If the value of the specific operating port passage counter 203d is 0 as a result of the confirmation in the processing of S1522 (S1522: Yes), it is confirmed whether the value of the signal output management counter 203c is 0 (S1532).

  When the value of the signal output management counter 203c is not 0 as a result of the confirmation in the processing of S1532, that is, when a value larger than 0 is confirmed (S1532: No), it is not output to the hole computer 262 (not transmitted, waiting) This shows that the specific output port passing signal is being managed by the signal output management counter 203c in the absence of the specific operating port passing signal in ()). In such a case, first, the value of the signal output management counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S1533), and it is checked whether the value of the signal output management counter 203c is smaller than 250 (S1534).

  As a result of the check in S1534, if the value of the signal output management counter 203c is equal to or greater than 250 (S1534: No), in such a case, if there is no specific operation port passing signal that has not been output to the hole computer 262, then 1 Indicates that the specific operating port passage signal is being output, the flow shifts to the process of S1531. As a result, the output of the specific operation port passage signal is continued.

  On the other hand, if the value of the signal output management counter 203c is smaller than 250 as a result of the confirmation in the processing of S1534 (S1531: Yes), the second period (0.5 s) after the end of the output of the specific operation port passing signal is completed. Since the time is being measured, the process proceeds to another setting process (S1528) while the output state of the setting data bit corresponding to the specific operation port passing signal is set to 0 (off).

  Therefore, when there is no specific operation port passing signal that has not been output to the hole computer 262, a first period (30s) that is an initial setting output period for one specific operation port entering ball passing signal, Management of both the second period (0.5 s), which is the off period after the end of the output of the specific operation port passing signal, is achieved by setting the initial value to the signal output management counter 203c once by the processing of S1529. You can do it.

  If the value of the signal output management counter 203c is 0 (S1532: Yes), there is no specific operation port passage signal to be output and no specific operation port passage signal to be period-managed. The process moves to S1508).

  As described above, according to the external information processing (S512) executed by the pachinko machine of the second embodiment, the specific operation port passage signal is output in the presence of the unoutput specific operation port passage signal. In this case, the output period of the specific operation port passage signal is secured as a third period at least for a preset period (0.5 s in the present embodiment), and the entire output period is set to the initial set value (this period). In the embodiment, it is adjusted to be shorter than 30 s). That is, the output period of the specific operation port passing signal is adjusted to a period that is equal to or longer than the third period that is set in advance and that is shorter than the initial setting value (first period) of the output period.

  It should be noted that, when the specific operation port passage signal is output in the presence of the unoutput specific operation port passage signal, there are the following cases. If an unoutput specific working port passing signal is generated during the output of the mouth passing signal, or (2) the specific operating port passing signal that is not output even if the output of the specific working port passing signal is newly started. Is assumed to remain.

  Here, in the case of the above (1), from the start of the output of the specific operating port passing signal to the generation of the non-output specific operating port passing signal, in the above-described external information processing (S512), ( The processing is executed in the order of S1522: Yes) → (S1532: No) → S1533 → (S1534: No) → S1531. However, when a non-output specific working port passage signal is generated, (S1522: No) → (S1532: No) → After the processing is executed in the order of S1524, the confirmation processing of S1525 is executed.

  At this time, if the specific operating port passage signal being output has already been output for the third period (0.5 s in the present embodiment), the branch processing of No in S1525 is executed, and as a result, The output of the specific operating port passage signal is ended without waiting for the elapse of the output period of the initial setting (the first period, 30 s in the present embodiment), and the OFF period (the second period, 0 in the present embodiment). .5s), the value of the signal output management counter 203c is reset by the processing of S1527.

  On the other hand, if the output period of the specific operating port passing signal being output has not yet reached the third period (0.5 s in the present embodiment), the Yes branching process in S1525 is executed, As a result, at least the third period is secured as the output period of the specific operation port passage signal.

  In the case of the above (2), after the output of the specific operating port passing signal is started, the output period of the specific operating port passing signal being output is the third period (0.5 s in the present embodiment). Is reached, the branching process of Yes in S1525 is executed. As a result, the output period of the specific operating port passage signal is set to only the third period (0.5 s in the present embodiment).

  Next, referring to FIG. 25, a specific operation port passing signal output from the pachinko machine of the second embodiment to hall computer 262 (the output state of the corresponding setting data bit in external output buffer 203a is 1) Will be described. FIG. 25 is a timing chart showing the output timing of the specific operation port passage signal in the pachinko machine of the second embodiment.

  FIG. 25A shows that the passage interval of the sphere to the upper operating port 602 or the lower operating port 603 is set as an initial value in the signal output management counter 203c by the processing of S1529 in the above-described external information processing (see FIG. 24). 6 is a timing chart exemplifying a case where the period is equal to or longer than a period (30.5 s).

  As shown in FIG. 25A, a detection signal sg11 (ON signal) indicating that a ball has passed through the upper operation port 602 is output from the upper operation port switch (part of the various switches 208), that is, the upper When the passage of the ball to the operation port 602 is detected by the upper operation port switch, the corresponding setting data bit in the external output buffer 203a is inverted from 0 to 1, and the detection signal sg11 of 1 (ie, one winning) The output of the one specific operation port passage signal ON11 for is started.

  When the output of the specific operation port passage signal ON11 is started, the process of S1529 in the external information processing (see FIG. 24) is executed, and an initial value is set in the signal output management counter 203c. The initial value set at this time is set in advance as a first period (30 s) which is an output period of an initial setting for one specific operation port entering ball passing signal and an OFF period after the output of the specific operation port passing signal. It is a value corresponding to the total period of the second period (0.5 s).

  During the time measurement of the period by the signal output management counter 203c, the passage of the ball to the upper working port 602 or the lower working port 603 is not detected, and the specific passing port is determined by the determination processing of S1534 in the external information processing (see FIG. 24). When it is determined that the output period of the pass signal has elapsed for the initial setting period (30 s in the present embodiment), the corresponding setting data bit in the external output buffer 203a is returned from 1 to 0, thereby passing through the specific operation port. The output of the signal ON11 ends.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, a value corresponding to 30.5 s, which is a total period of the output period (30 s) of the initial setting for the specific operating port passing signal ON11 and the OFF period OF11, is obtained by the processing of S1529. Since the signal output management counter 203c is set as the initial value, the value of the signal output management counter 203c does not reach 0 even when the signal output management counter 203c measures the output period of 30 s. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the signal output management counter 203c does not set an initial value for measuring the OFF period OF11 even after the output of the specific operating port passage signal ON11 ends, The OFF period OF11 (0.5 s in the present embodiment) can be subsequently measured.

  Outside the period in which the detection signal sg12 (ON signal) indicating that the ball has passed through the lower operation port 602 is managed by the signal output management counter 203c with respect to the detection signal sg11, the lower operation port switch (a part of the various switches 208) ), The processing of S1529 in the external information processing (see FIG. 24) is executed as in the case where the detection signal sg11 is output, and 30.5 s is set as the initial value in the signal output management counter 203c. Is set. As a result, similarly to the period management for the detection signal sg11, even after the output of the specific operation port passing signal ON12 ends, the initial value for measuring the OFF period OF12 is not set in the signal output management counter 203c, The off period OF12 can be subsequently timed.

  FIG. 25B is a timing chart illustrating a case where a non-output specific operation port passage signal is generated during the output of the specific operation port passage signal in a state where the unoutput specific operation port passage signal does not remain. .

  As shown in FIG. 25B, when a detection signal sg21 (ON signal) indicating that a ball has passed through the upper operation port 602 is output from the upper operation port switch (a part of the various switches 208), an external output is performed. The corresponding setting data bit in the buffer 203a is inverted from 0 to 1, and the output of one specific operating port passage signal ON21 for one detection signal sg21 is started.

  On the other hand, before the output period of the specific operating port passage signal ON21 reaches the initial setting output period of 30 s, the detection signal sg22 (ON signal) indicating that the ball has passed through the lower operating port 603 is output from the lower operating port. When output from a switch (a part of various switches 208), the corresponding setting data bit in the external output buffer 203a is set according to the output timing of the detection signal sg22 even before the output period of the initial setting is reached. Is returned from 1 to 0, and the output of the specific working port passage signal ON21 is ended.

  That is, in such a case, the output period of the specific operation port passage signal ON21 is secured by the determination process of S1525 in the external information processing (see FIG. 24) to at least the output period (third period) of 0.5 s. , S1526, the period is adjusted (reduced) to a period of less than 30 s, which is the initial output period (first period).

  After the output of the specific operating port passage signal ON21, the output of the specific operating port passing signal ON22 with respect to the detection signal sg22 output during the output of the specific operating port passing signal ON21 is performed after the elapse of the OFF period OF22 of 0.5 s. (Ie, the corresponding setting data bit in the external output buffer 203a is inverted from 0 to 1).

  Here, before the output period of the specific operation port passage signal ON22 reaches 30s, which is the output period of the initial setting, the detection signal sg23 (ON signal) indicating that the ball has passed through the upper operation port 602 is output. When output from the switch (part of the various switches 208), the output period of the specific operating port passing signal ON22 is set to 0.5 seconds as in the adjustment of the output period of the specific operating port passing signal ON22 described above. It is adjusted to an output period of less than 30 s while securing.

  Then, after the output of the specific operating port passage signal ON22 is completed, and further after the OFF period OF22 of 0.5 s elapses, the output of the specific operating port passing signal ON23 with respect to the detection signal sg23 is started. At this time, if the passage of a new ball to the upper operation port 602 or the lower operation port 603 is not detected, the specific operation port passage signal ON23 is turned off after the elapse of the output period of 30 s.

  According to the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, during the output of the specific operation port passage signal in a situation where the unoutput specific operation port passage signal does not remain, if the non-output specific operation port passage signal is generated, the specific As in the case of the working-port passage signals ON21 and ON22, the output period is shortened from the initial set value of 30 s.

  Therefore, even if a non-output specific operation port passage signal is generated during the output of the specific operation port passage signal in a state where the unoutput specific operation port passage signal does not remain, the detection signal and the specific operation for the detection signal are performed. The time difference from the output timing of the mouth passing signal can be minimized.

  Further, as described above, although the time difference between the detection signal and the output timing of the specific operation port passing signal with respect to the detection signal is made as small as possible, the OFF period is set to 0 as the second period in advance. .5s is ensured, so that the player can visually blink the data display controlled by the hall computer 262 which has received the specific operating port passage signal in units of adjacent specific operating port passing signals in chronological order. Can be distinguished.

  FIG. 25C is a timing chart exemplifying a case in which the output of the specific operating port passing signal is newly started and an unoutputted specific operating port passing signal remains.

  As shown in FIG. 25C, when a detection signal sg31 (ON signal) indicating that a ball has passed through the upper operation port 602 is output from the upper operation port switch (a part of the various switches 208), an external output is performed. The corresponding setting data bit in the buffer 203a is inverted from 0 to 1, and the output of the 1 specific operation port passing signal ON31 for the 1 detection signal sg31 is started.

  Here, before the output period of the specific operating port passage signal ON31 reaches the initial setting output period of 30 s, the detection signal sg32 (ON signal) indicating that the ball has passed through the upper operating port 602 is activated again. When output from the mouth switch, the output period of the specific operating port passing signal ON31 is secured in the output period (third period) of at least 0.5 s according to the output timing of the detection signal sg32, and the initial setting period is maintained. The output period (first period) is adjusted (reduced) to a period of less than 30 s.

  The output of the specific operating port passing signal ON32 with respect to the detection signal sg32 is started after the lapse of the 0.5 second OFF period OF31 after the output of the specific operating port passing signal ON31 ends.

  At this time, the detection signal sg33 (ON signal) indicating that the ball passed through the lower operation port 603 was output from the lower operation port switch (a part of the various switches 208) during the OFF period OF31 of 0.5 s. In this case, even after the specific operation port passing signal ON32 for the detection signal sg32 is output, the standby state is maintained without outputting the specific operation port passing signal ON33 for the detection signal sg33.

  In such a situation, in the pachinko machine of the second embodiment, the specific operating port passage signal ON32 is output for 0.5 s by executing the Yes branch processing in S1525 of the external information processing (see FIG. 24) in such a situation. Thereafter, by executing the No branching process in S1526, the corresponding setting data bit in the external output buffer 203a is returned from 1 to 0, and the output of the specific operating port passage signal ON32 is ended.

  Then, the output of the specific operation port passage signal ON33 with respect to the detection signal sg33 is started after the lapse of the 0.5 second OFF period OF32 from the end of the output of the specific operation port passage signal ON32. If the passage of a new ball to the upper operating port 602 or the lower operating port 603 is not detected after the output of the specific operating port passing signal ON33, the specific operating port passing signal ON33 is turned off after the output period of 30 s. You.

  According to the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, even if the output of the specific operating port passing signal is newly started, if the unoutputted specific operating port passing signal remains, as in the specific operating port passing signal ON32, , The output period is reduced to 0.5 s, which is set in advance as the third period. Therefore, the waiting period of the specific operation port passage signal ON33 with respect to the detection signal sg33 can be minimized.

  Therefore, even if the output of the specific operating port passing signal is newly started, even if a non-output specific operating port passing signal still remains, the detection signal and the specific operating port passing signal corresponding to the detection signal may not be detected. The time difference from the output timing can be minimized.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the third period visually distinguishes the blinking of the data display controlled by the hall computer 262 that has received the specific operating port passing signal by the player in units of the specific operating port passing signal. Since the time is set to 0.5 s to allow the player to turn on, the data display controlled by the hall computer 262 that has received the specific operating port passing signal blinks visually in units of the specific operating port passing signal. Can be distinguished.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine of the second embodiment, when outputting the specific operating port passage signal, the signal output management counter 203c, which is one of the counters, outputs the initially set output period (first output period). Is set as an initial value of the sum of the second period, which is set in advance as an OFF period after the output of the specific operation port passing signal is completed. Therefore, even after the output of such a signal is terminated due to the elapse of the output period of the initial setting for the specific operation port passing signal, the off period continues without setting the initial value for measuring the subsequent off period. Can be timed.

  That is, according to the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, when there is no specific operation port passing signal that has not been output to the hole computer 262, the output period of the initial setting for one specific operation port entering ball passing signal is present. The management of both the certain first period and the second period which is the off period after the end of the output of the specific operation port passing signal is performed by only one signal output management counter 203c at the start timing of the second period. This can be achieved without having to set initial values. Therefore, the control load on MPU 201 of main controller 110 can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the second period, which is the off period after the end of the output of the specific operating port passing signal, is set by the player using the data display controlled by the hall computer 262 that has received the specific operating port passing signal. The blinking is set to be an off period that can be visually distinguished in units of the specific operation port passing signal that is adjacent in time series. What is necessary is just a period (for example, a period of 52 ms as in the first embodiment) in which the working port passage signal can be distinguished. By setting the second period managed by the signal output management counter 203c to a period in which the hall computer 262 can distinguish the specific operating port passing signals that are adjacent in time series, the hall computer 262 becomes adjacent in time series. The specific operating port passing signal can be reliably detected.

  Similarly, in the present embodiment, during the third period, the player visually blinks the data display controlled by the hall computer 262 that has received the specific operating port passing signal in units of the specific operating port passing signal. The third period is a period during which the hall computer 262 can distinguish the specific operating port passage signal (for example, a period of 52 ms as in the first embodiment). I just need. By setting the third period managed by the signal output management counter 203c to be a period in which the hall computer 262 can distinguish the adjacent specific operating port passing signals in time series, the hall computer 262 can determine one specific operating port. Each of the passing signals can be reliably detected.

  Further, in this embodiment, the hall computer 262 uses the specific operating port passing signal output from the external output terminal board 261 and uses the data display during the output period of the specific operating port passing signal (that is, during the ON period). Is blinked and the data display is turned off during the off period, so that a display substantially corresponding to the hit state of the pachinko machine can be performed. Therefore, the hall computer 262 can respond to a state (for example, a hit state) generated in the pachinko machine without providing a counter for measuring a period during which the data display is blinked or performing control for measuring the period. The number of occurrences of the state (for example, the number of winnings that generate the winning state) can be grasped while performing the display.

  As described above, the present invention has been described based on one embodiment. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred.

  For example, in each of the above embodiments, the initial state of the output state of the signal output from the main control device 110 is set to 0 (off), and the first entrance port passing signal and the specific operating port passing signal are inverted from the initial state. 1 (on) is maintained over the output period. However, if the initial state of the output state is 1, the initial state is inverted and maintained at 0 over the output period. The passage signal and the specific operation port passage signal may be used.

  In each of the above embodiments, when the first entrance port passing signal and the specific operating port passing signal are output, the initial value is set in the signal output management counter 203c, and the value of the signal output management counter 203c is subtracted. Although the first period and the second period are configured to measure (manage) by moving, the first period and the second period are both measured by a method of adding the signal output management counter 203c from 0. It may be configured to measure time. Specifically, with the start of the output of the first entrance port passage signal and the specific operation port passage signal, the signal output management counter 203c starts counting time from 0, and monitors whether or not the first period has been reached. Then, if it is determined that the first period has been reached, the signal may be turned off, and further, it may be configured to monitor whether or not the total period of the first period and the second period has been reached.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the first entrance port passing signal and the specific working port passing signal are exemplified as the signals to be managed, but the present invention can be applied to various signals. In addition, like a 1st entrance port passage signal and a specific operation port passage signal, a passage which creates (or has the possibility of) a state advantageous to a player as compared with a normal state upon passage of a ball is triggered. When applied to the signal output when the ball passes through, the number of times the ball has passed through the passage opening that creates (or has the possibility of) a state advantageous to the player as compared with the normal state is determined by the hall computer. 262 can be ascertained reliably, and such data can be used by a hall manager for purposes such as nail adjustment and fraud monitoring.

  Further, when the variable display is started in the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81, a signal is output from the external output terminal board 261 to the hall computer 262, and this signal is adopted as a signal to be managed. May be. When the signal indicating the start of the fluctuation display is adopted as a signal to be managed, for example, every time the fluctuation start process (see FIG. 10) is executed, the signal is changed in the same manner as the external information processing (see FIG. 13). What is necessary is just to comprise so that output processing may be performed. Alternatively, every time the fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 10) is executed, the value of the first entrance passage counter 203b is subtracted, and when the value of the first entrance passage counter 203b is subtracted, the external information It may be configured to execute the same signal output processing as the processing (see FIG. 13).

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the management device is provided from the main control device 110 to the outside of the pachinko machine (the pachinko machine 10), such as the first entrance port passing signal and the specific operating port passing signal. Although the case of outputting to the hall computer 262 has been illustrated, the present invention is also applicable to the output of signals from the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114 to the hall computer 262. Further, the present invention can be applied to the output of signals inside the pachinko machine, such as the output of signals from the main control device 110 to the payout control device 111.

  Further, in the second embodiment, the ten electric auditors 661a, 662a, 663a, 664a, 665a, 691a, 692a, 693a, 694a, 695a are driven by the corresponding winning solenoids 210a to 210j. However, instead of the electric accessory, an accessory that operates by a mechanical link mechanism may be provided.

  For example, when a ball wins in the upper operating port 602, the accessories arranged at the entrances of the upper first to fifth winning ports 661 to 665 are simultaneously opened by a mechanical link mechanism, and When a ball wins in the first to upper fifth operating ports 651 to 655, the ball is arranged at the entrance of the corresponding upper winning port (upper first to upper fifth winning port 661 to 665) by a mechanical link mechanism. In the case where the played role is released and the ball wins in the upper first to fifth fifth winning openings 661 to 665, the upper winning opening (upper first to upper fifth winning opening) won by the mechanical link mechanism. 661 to 665) may be configured so that the accessory provided at the entrance is closed.

  Similarly, when a ball wins in the lower actuation opening 603, the accessories arranged at the entrances of the lower first to upper fifth winning openings 691 to 695 are simultaneously opened by a mechanical link mechanism, When a ball wins in the lower first to upper fifth operating ports 681 to 685, the ball is distributed to the corresponding lower winning port (lower first to fifth lower winning port 691 to 695) by a mechanical link mechanism. In the case where the provided accessory is opened and a ball wins in the lower first to lower fifth winning openings 691 to 695, the lower winning opening (lower first to lower fifth winning) which has been won by a mechanical link mechanism. The accessory provided at the entrance of the ports 691 to 695) may be configured to be closed.

  In the first embodiment, all the balls that have entered (winned) into the first entrance 64 are counted by the first entrance passage counter 203b, but are stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 ( It may be configured to count only the spheres to be suspended. That is, only when the number N of active balls is less than 4 (the number N of active balls N = 0 to 4), the first entrance opening passage counter 203b responds to the entry (prize) to the first entrance 64. May be added by one. Specifically, in the start winning process (see FIG. 12), the process of S602 may be executed after the Yes branch process in S603, not after the Yes branch process in S601.

  The present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, the present invention may be applied to a so-called second-type pachinko gaming machine having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone. Furthermore, other than a pachinko machine, it may be implemented as another game machine such as an arepachi or a sparrow ball.

  The present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a jackpot has been hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times right item) can increase the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times). ). Further, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area after the big hit symbol is displayed. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is awarded in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as areaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, so-called game machines in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating an operation lever in a state where a symbol is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button. Things. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows: "a display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided by operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time is a specific one ". In this case, coins, medals, etc. are representative game media. As an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Not included. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer.

  Hereinafter, a gaming machine and a modified example of the present invention will be described. State detecting means for detecting the occurrence of a predetermined state during a game in which a game medium is passed through the game area and a game value is provided to a player according to satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and the state is detected by the state detecting means In response to one occurrence of a state, the state of signal 1 is generated by inverting the output state of the signal from the first state and maintaining it for a preset first period, and then inverting it again to return to the first state. And a signal output means for outputting a signal, wherein when the signal output means starts outputting the state generation signal, the elapsed time from when the output of the state generation signal is started is measured. A period measuring unit, a first arrival determining unit that can determine whether the elapsed period measured by the period measuring unit has reached the first period, and the elapse period by the first arrival determining unit. Then, after it is determined that the first period has been reached, the elapsed period measured by the period measuring unit is changed to a total period of the first period and a preset second period. A gaming machine 1 comprising: a second arrival determination means capable of determining whether the vehicle has arrived.

  According to the gaming machine 1, when the occurrence of a predetermined state during a game in which a game medium is passed through the game area and a game value is given to the player in accordance with establishment of the predetermined condition is detected by the state detection unit , One state generation signal is output by the signal output means for one detected state occurrence. Here, the 1 state generation signal is generated by inverting the output state of the signal from the first state, maintaining the output state for the first period set in advance, and then inverting again to return to the first state. .

  When the output of the state generation signal by the signal output means is started in such a manner (that is, the output state of the signal is inverted from the first state), the elapsed time from the start of the output of the state generation signal is The measurement is started by the period measuring means. When the measurement of the elapsed period by the period measurement unit is started, first, the first arrival determination unit determines whether the elapsed period has reached the first period, that is, the output state of the signal is inverted again and the first arrival determination unit determines the first period. It is determined whether it is time to return to the state.

  When the first arrival determination unit determines that the elapsed period measured by the period measurement unit has reached the first period, the elapsed period subsequently reaches the second period set in advance. Is determined. Here, the second period is a period in which the operation device (for example, a management device installed outside the gaming machine) to which the state generation signal is output can distinguish the state generation signals adjacent in time series. In this case, the state generation signals adjacent in time series can be surely distinguished by the output destination arithmetic device. As a result, the occurrence of the state detected momentarily by the state detecting means can be reliably detected by the output destination arithmetic device.

  Therefore, both the management of the output period of the state generation signal (that is, the first period) and the management of the predetermined period after the output of the state generation signal (that is, the second period) are measured in each period. This can be realized without performing the process of setting the period measuring means according to the start timing. Therefore, the control load associated with outputting the state generation signal to the arithmetic unit every time a state is generated can be reduced.

  The lapse from the start of the output of the state generation signal by the signal output unit to the first period extends from the start of the output of the state generation signal by the signal output unit to the total period of the first period and the second period. Since it is measured as a passing point between the two, there is no need to provide a plurality of time-measurable components such as a counter and a timer as period measuring means, and it is possible to suppress consumption of storage capacity in the storage device.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the state detecting means described in the gaming machine 1 corresponds to a first entrance switch, an upper-stage operation port switch, and an upper-stage operation port switch (all not shown). External information processing (S505, S512) and external output processing (S201) correspond to the signal output means described in the machine 1, and the signal output management counter 203c as the period measuring means described in the gaming machine 1 , And the processing of S1504 and S1533 to count down the signal output management counter 203c corresponds to the first arrival determination means described in the gaming machine 1 corresponds to the processing of S1506 and S1534 and described in the gaming machine 1 The processes of S1502 and S1532 correspond to the second arrival determination means.

  In the gaming machine 1, when the output of the state generation signal is started by the signal output unit, the period measurement unit sets a value corresponding to a sum period of the first period and the second period as an initial value. The period measuring means includes a period setting means for setting the elapsed time by a method of subtracting a value set by the period setting means after the output of the state generation signal by the signal output means is started. A gaming machine 2 for measuring.

  According to the gaming machine 2, when the output of the state generation signal is started by the signal output means (that is, the output state of the signal is inverted from the first state), the first period and the second period are switched. A value corresponding to the sum period is set in the period setting means as an initial value. Thereafter, after the output of the state generation signal by the signal output unit is started, the period elapsed from the start of the output of the state generation signal by a method of subtracting the value set by the period setting unit is measured by the period measurement unit. You.

  Therefore, since the value set as the initial value in the period measuring unit is a value corresponding to the total period of the first period and the second period, once the initial value is set in the period measuring unit, It is possible to measure both the progress up to the first period and the total period of the first period and the second period, and to control the output of the state generation signal to the arithmetic unit every time a state is generated. The load can be reduced.

  Further, the period measuring unit in which a value corresponding to the sum period of the first period and the second period is set as an initial value is used for a period from the start of output of the state generation signal by the signal output unit to the first period. Since both the progress and the progress up to the sum of the first period and the second period can be measured, there is no need to provide a plurality of time-measurable components such as counters and timers as the period measuring means, and the storage device Consumption of the storage capacity in the storage device.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the processing in S1505 and S1529 corresponds to the period setting unit described in the gaming machine 2.

  In the gaming machine 1 or 2, the second period is a period in which an arithmetic device to which the state generation signal is output can distinguish the state generation signals adjacent in time series. 3.

  According to the gaming machine 3, in the second period after the output of the state generation signal ends, the arithmetic device (for example, a management device installed outside the gaming machine), which is the output destination of the state generation signal, is chronologically determined. Since the period in which adjacent state occurrence signals can be distinguished is set as a period, adjacent state occurrence signals in time series can be reliably distinguished by the output destination arithmetic device. As a result, the occurrence of the state detected momentarily by the state detecting means can be reliably detected by the output destination arithmetic device.

  In any of the gaming machines 1 to 3, the second period is a shortest period in which the arithmetic device can distinguish the state generation signals adjacent in time series or a nearby period longer than the shortest period. A gaming machine 4 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine 4, since the second period is the shortest period or a period near the shortest period in which the processing device at the output destination can distinguish the state generation signals adjacent in chronological order, the generation of each state is performed. The difference between the timing and the output timing of the state generation signal can be reduced. Therefore, not only can the output destination arithmetic unit reliably distinguish adjacent state generation signals in time series, but also the period from the end of output of the state generation signal to the start of output of the next state generation signal is maximized or almost maximized. Data acquisition efficiency can be improved.

  A gaming machine 5 in any of the gaming machines 1 to 4, wherein the first period and the second period are substantially the same.

  According to the gaming machine 5, the first period and the second period are substantially the same, that is, the output period of the state generation signal, and after the end of the output of the state generation signal, the next state generation signal is output to the arithmetic unit of the output destination. Are substantially the same as the period required to be able to distinguish them, so that management of each period can be facilitated. Further, the difference between the generation timing of each state and the output timing of the state generation signal can be reduced, and the data acquisition efficiency can be improved.

  Here, by making the second period a period in which the arithmetic device which is the output destination of the state generation signal can distinguish the state generation signals adjacent in time series, the management of each period is easy and The state generation signals that are adjacent in series can be surely distinguished by the output destination arithmetic device. In particular, the difference between the occurrence timing of each state and the output timing of the state generation signal is reduced by setting the second period to be the shortest period in which a signal can be detected by the arithmetic device of the output destination or a period near the shortest period. Data acquisition efficiency can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines 1 to 5, after the output of the state generation signal by the signal output unit is started, before the first arrival determination unit determines that the elapsed period has reached the summation period, or When the occurrence of the state is newly detected by the state detection unit before the elapsed time reaches the summation period by the second arrival determination unit, the second arrival determination unit Waiting means for waiting for the output of the state generation signal by the signal output means for the occurrence of the newly detected state until it is determined that the elapsed period has reached the summation period. A gaming machine 6 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine 6, after the output of the state generation signal by the signal output unit is started, before the first arrival determination unit determines that the elapsed period has reached the summation period, or by the second arrival determination unit. If the occurrence of a state is newly detected by the state detection means before it is determined that the elapsed period has reached the summation period, the output of the state generation signal by the signal output means in response to the occurrence of the newly detected state. Are waited by the standby means until the second arrival determination means determines that the elapsed period has reached the summation period. Therefore, it is possible to make the output destination arithmetic device surely detect the state that is detected every moment.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the first entrance passage counter 203b corresponds to the standby unit described in the gaming machine 6.

  In any one of the gaming machines 1 to 6, the state of which occurrence is detected by the state detecting means creates a state advantageous to the player as compared to the normal state or the possibility of the possibility when the passing of the game medium. The gaming machine 7, wherein the game medium passes through a specific passage portion having the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine 7, a state advantageous to the player is created or has a possibility as compared with the normal state when the game medium passes (for example, a state advantageous to the player is created as a result of the lottery). The passing of the game medium to the specific passing portion is detected as occurrence of a state by the state detecting means. Therefore, the number of times the game medium has passed through the specific passage section that creates or has a possibility of being advantageous to the player as compared with the normal state can be grasped by the output destination management device, and such data can be managed by the hall management. Can be used for purposes such as nail adjustment and fraud monitoring.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the first entrance 64, the upper specific operating port 602, and the lower specific operating port 603 are illustrated as the specific passing sections described in the gaming machine 7.

  The gaming machine 8 according to any one of the gaming machines 1 to 7, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in response to operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided in an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is a case where the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable the ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

  The gaming machine 9 according to any one of the gaming machines 1 to 7, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is as follows. The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

The gaming machine 10 according to any one of the gaming machines 1 to 7, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, centralized management by a hall computer has been implemented for gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slots installed in a game arcade (for example, Patent Document 1: JP-A-7-59935 and Patent Document 2: 2005-334218). As such a form of centralized management, for example, a starting port winning signal indicating that a game ball has won to a predetermined winning port (for example, a starting port where a jackpot lottery is triggered by winning of a game ball), Signals corresponding to various states generated during the game, such as a prize ball signal indicating that a ball has been paid out by winning a prize hole, a jackpot signal indicating a jackpot state (hereinafter, this signal is referred to as a "state generation signal ) May be output from each of the gaming machines to the hall computer, and on the side of the hall computer receiving these signals, the number of pitches per jackpot and the number of balls other than during the jackpot are determined based on the received signals. The number of pitches (base) is calculated, and the result is output to a monitor or paper.
In this manner, data output from the hall computer, for example, data such as the number of pitches per jackpot, the number of pitches other than during the jackpot, and the number of game balls passing through the starting port, obtain appropriate profits. For the purpose, it is used by hall managers for pachinko machine nail adjustment and fraud monitoring.
Here, the output of the state generation signal from each gaming machine to the hall computer is started by generating an ON signal whose output state is inverted when a predetermined state occurs, and thereafter, the hall computer outputs the ON signal. Is continued for the first period (for example, 0.5 s) in which the ON state can be detected, and then the output state is inverted again to end.
On the other hand, in order for the hall computer to distinguish the state generation signals adjacent in time series, after the output of the state generation signal is completed by inverting the output state again, the output state is changed to the second period (for example, 0). .5s). Therefore, when the gaming machine outputs the state generation signal to the hall computer, the hall computer can distinguish between the first period which is the output period of the ON signal serving as the state generation signal and the state generation signal which is adjacent in time series to the hall computer. It is required for the gaming machine to manage the second period which is the period.
One of the general methods by which the gaming machine manages the first period and the second period described above includes a first counter that measures a first period (ie, an output period of a state generation signal), And a second counter for measuring a period of 2 (that is, a period necessary for the hall computer to distinguish the next state generation signal after the output of the state generation signal is completed), and each of these periods is measured. Is the way.
In such a method, for example, when the occurrence of a predetermined state is detected and the output of the state generation signal is started after the output of the state generation signal is started by the generation of the ON signal whose output state is inverted, An initial value corresponding to one period is set in the first counter, and the first period is measured by sequentially subtracting the value of the first counter. Then, when the value of the first counter indicates zero, that is, when the output of the state generation signal ends, a second period is subsequently set in the second counter, and the second counter is set. The second period is measured by sequentially subtracting the values of.
Alternatively, as another method for the gaming machine to manage the first period and the second period, there is a method in which one counter manages both the first period and the second period. In such a method, for example, when the occurrence of a predetermined state is detected and the output of the state generation signal is started by generation of an ON signal whose output state is inverted, the first period is set in the counter, The first period is measured by sequentially subtracting the value of the counter. Then, when the value of the counter indicates zero, that is, when the output of the state generation signal ends, the second period is set in the counter, and the value of the counter is sequentially reduced by sequentially setting the second period. The period of 2 is measured.
However, all of the above-described methods require the processing of setting the first period and the second period in the counter and the timer according to the timing of measurement start in each period, and the control by the control device is complicated. There was a problem of becoming. In particular, in the former method, it is necessary to provide a plurality of counters and timers according to the number of periods to be managed, and the storage capacity of the storage device increases.
The present technical concept has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and provides a gaming machine in which a control load associated with outputting a state generation signal to an external device such as a hall computer is effectively reduced. It is intended to be.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 has a predetermined state during a game in which a game medium is passed through a game area and a game value is given to a player according to establishment of a predetermined condition. State detecting means for detecting the occurrence, and for one occurrence of the state detected by the state detecting means, the output state of the signal is inverted from the first state and maintained for a preset first period. And a signal output means for outputting a state generation signal of 1 by inverting again and returning to the first state, wherein the output of the state generation signal is started by the signal output means. A period measuring means for measuring an elapsed period from when the output of the state generation signal is started, and a first period capable of determining whether the elapsed period measured by the period measuring unit has reached the first period. Reach of The determining means and the elapsed time measured by the period measuring means after the elapsed time has been determined to have reached the first time period by the first arrival determining means is the first time period. And a second arrival determination means capable of determining whether or not the total period of the predetermined period and the second period has been reached.
The gaming machine according to the second technical concept is the gaming machine according to the first technical concept, wherein when the output of the state generation signal is started by the signal output unit, the first period and the second period are different from each other. A period setting unit that sets a value corresponding to the total period of the period as an initial value in the period measuring unit. The period measuring unit sets the period after the output of the state generation signal by the signal output unit is started. The elapsed period is measured by a method of subtracting a value set by the means.
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3 is the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1 or 2, wherein, in the second period, the state in which an arithmetic device which is the output destination of the state generation signal is adjacent in time series. This is a period in which generated signals can be distinguished.
In the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in the gaming machine described in any of the technical ideas 1 to 3, the first period and the second period are substantially the same.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the occurrence of the predetermined state during the game in which the game medium is passed through the game area and the game value is given to the player according to the establishment of the predetermined condition is the state detecting means. When the state is detected, one state generation signal is output by the signal output means for one detected state occurrence. Here, the 1 state generation signal is generated by inverting the output state of the signal from the first state, maintaining the output state for the first period set in advance, and then inverting again to return to the first state. .
When the output of the state generation signal by the signal output means is started in such a manner (that is, the output state of the signal is inverted from the first state), the elapsed time from the start of the output of the state generation signal is The measurement is started by the period measuring means. When the measurement of the elapsed period by the period measurement unit is started, first, the first arrival determination unit determines whether the elapsed period has reached the first period, that is, the output state of the signal is inverted again and the first arrival determination unit determines the first period. It is determined whether it is time to return to the state.
When the first arrival determination unit determines that the elapsed period measured by the period measurement unit has reached the first period, the elapsed period subsequently reaches the second period set in advance. Is determined. Here, the second period is a period in which the operation device (for example, a management device installed outside the gaming machine) to which the state generation signal is output can distinguish the state generation signals adjacent in time series. In this case, the state generation signals adjacent in time series can be surely distinguished by the output destination arithmetic device. As a result, the occurrence of the state detected momentarily by the state detecting means can be reliably detected by the output destination arithmetic device.
Therefore, both the management of the output period of the state generation signal (that is, the first period) and the management of the predetermined period after the output of the state generation signal (that is, the second period) are measured in each period. This can be realized without performing the process of setting the period measuring means according to the start timing. Therefore, there is an effect that the control load associated with outputting the state generation signal to the arithmetic unit every time a state is generated can be reduced.
The lapse from the start of the output of the state generation signal by the signal output unit to the first period extends from the start of the output of the state generation signal by the signal output unit to the total period of the first period and the second period. Since it is measured as a passing point between the two, there is no need to provide a plurality of time-measurable components such as a counter and a timer as a period measuring means, and it is possible to suppress the consumption of storage capacity in the storage device.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effects are obtained. When the output of the state generation signal is started by the signal output means (that is, the output state of the signal is inverted from the first state), the value corresponding to the sum period of the first period and the second period is It is set in the period setting means as an initial value. Thereafter, after the output of the state generation signal by the signal output unit is started, the period elapsed from the start of the output of the state generation signal by a method of subtracting the value set by the period setting unit is measured by the period measurement unit. You.
Therefore, since the value set as the initial value in the period measuring unit is a value corresponding to the total period of the first period and the second period, once the initial value is set in the period measuring unit, It is possible to measure both the progress up to the first period and the total period of the first period and the second period, and to control the output of the state generation signal to the arithmetic unit every time a state is generated. There is an effect that the load can be reduced.
Further, the period measuring unit in which a value corresponding to the sum period of the first period and the second period is set as an initial value is used for a period from the start of output of the state generation signal by the signal output unit to the first period. Since both the progress and the progress up to the sum of the first period and the second period can be measured, there is no need to provide a plurality of time-measurable components such as counters and timers as the period measuring means, and the storage device There is an effect that the consumption of storage capacity can be suppressed.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the following effects are obtained. In the second period after the end of the output of the state generation signal, the arithmetic device (for example, a management device installed outside the game machine), which is the output destination of the state generation signal, distinguishes the state generation signals adjacent in time series. Since the period is set as possible, the state generation signals adjacent in time series can be surely distinguished by the output destination arithmetic device. As a result, there is an effect that the occurrence of a state detected momentarily by the state detection means can be reliably detected by the output destination arithmetic device.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in any of the technical ideas 1 to 3, the following effects are obtained. The first period and the second period are substantially the same, that is, the output period of the state generation signal is required to be able to distinguish the next state generation signal after the output of the state generation signal from the output destination arithmetic device. Since the same period is substantially the same, there is an effect that management of each period can be facilitated. In addition, the difference between the generation timing of each state and the output timing of the state generation signal can be reduced, and there is an effect that the data acquisition efficiency can be improved.
Here, by making the second period a period in which the arithmetic device which is the output destination of the state generation signal can distinguish the state generation signals adjacent in time series, it is easy to manage each period, The state generation signals that are adjacent in series can be reliably distinguished by the output destination arithmetic device. In particular, the difference between the occurrence timing of each state and the output timing of the state generation signal is reduced by setting the second period to the shortest period in which a signal can be detected by the arithmetic device of the output destination or a period near the shortest period. Data acquisition efficiency can be improved.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
203c signal output management counter (period measurement means)

Claims (4)

State detecting means for detecting the occurrence of a predetermined state during a game in which a game medium is passed through the game area and a game value is provided to a player according to satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and the state is detected by the state detecting means In response to one occurrence of a state, the state of signal 1 is generated by inverting the output state of the signal from the first state and maintaining it for a preset first period, and then inverting it again to return to the first state. A game machine having a signal output means for outputting a signal,
When the output of the state generation signal is started by the signal output unit, a period measurement unit that measures an elapsed period from the start of the output of the state generation signal,
A first arrival determination unit capable of determining whether the elapsed period measured by the period measurement unit has reached the first period,
Subsequent to the first arrival determination unit determining that the elapsed period has reached the first period, the elapsed period measured by the period measurement unit is set as the first period in advance. And a second arrival determination means capable of determining whether or not the total period with the second period has been reached. When the output of the state generation signal is started by the signal output unit, a period setting for setting the value corresponding to the sum period of the first period and the second period to the period measurement unit as an initial value. With means,
The period measuring unit measures the elapsed period by a method of subtracting a value set by the period setting unit after the output of the state generation signal by the signal output unit is started. The gaming machine according to claim 1.   3. The game according to claim 1, wherein the second period is a period in which an arithmetic device that is an output destination of the state generation signal can distinguish the state generation signals adjacent in time series. 4. Machine. 4. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the first period and the second period are substantially the same. 5.

Images